BA Cover S450 IP.qxd 14.07.

2006 17:42 Uhr Seite 1

Issued by
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG
Schlavenhorst 66
D-46395 Bocholt

Gigaset
2007
© Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG 2006
All rights reserved. Subject to availability.
Rights of modification reserved.

www.siemens.com/gigaset
S450 IP

cyan magenta yellow black Liebreich Medienproduktion

 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / overview.fm / 28.3.07

The handset at a glance

The handset at a glance Handset keys

1 Display in idle status (example)
2 Battery charge status
e V U (1/3 charged to fully charged)
= flashes: battery nearly empty
e V U flashes: battery charging
3 Display keys (page 25)
4 Message key
1 Opens calls and message lists

Ð V
Flashes: new message or new call
15 2 5 End call key, On/Off key
End call, cancel function, go back one menu
level (press briefly), back to idle status
INT 1 (press and hold), activate/deactivate
handset (press and hold in idle status)
10.06.06 09:45 6 Connection socket for headset (page 16)
7 Hash key
FixedLine IP Keypad lock on/off (press and hold,
page 24)
3
Toggle between upper/lower case letters
and digits for text entry (page 112)
14 8 Call-by-call list key (not for VoIP)
13 4 Open call-by-call list
12 5 9 Recall key (not for VoIP)
Enter flash (press briefly)
Insert a pause (press and hold)
11 10 Star key
Ringer tones on/off (press and hold in
idle status)
Open special characters table
6
11 Key 1 (press and hold)
10 7 Calling the network mailbox
12 Talk key
9 8 Accept call, open last number redial list
(press briefly in idle status), select connec-
tion type and start dialling (press briefly/
press and hold after entering the number,
page 21)
13 Handsfree key
Change between speaker/handsfree mode
Base station at a glance Lights up: handsfree talking activated
Flashes: incoming call
14 Control key (page 25)
15 Signal strength
Ò Ñ i (low to high)
| flashes: no reception
Base station key
1 Paging key
Lights up: LAN connection active
(phone is connected to router)
Flashes:
Data transfer to LAN connection
1 Press briefly: start paging (page 73)
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Press and hold:

Set base station to registration mode
(page 72)

1
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderIVZ.fm / 28.3.07

Contents

Contents Calling a Gigaset.net subscriber . . . . . 29

Network services –
The handset at a glance . . . . . . . . 1 fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Base station at a glance . . . . . . . . 1 Settings for all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Functions after a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Gigaset S450 IP – Network services – VoIP . . . . . . 32
more than just a telephone . . . . . 6 Settings for all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
VoIP – making calls via Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the directory and lists . . 34
Directory/call-by-call list . . . . . . . . . . . 34
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pack contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Opening lists with the
Setting up the handset for use . . . . . . . 7
message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installing the base station . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connecting the base station . . . . . . . 10 Making cost-effective calls . . . . 39
Making settings for VoIP telephony . . 12 Displaying the call duration . . . . . . . . 39
Belt clip and headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Linking call-by-call numbers
with a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Menu trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Phone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SMS (text messages) . . . . . . . . . 40
Web configurator menu . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Writing/sending an SMS . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Receiving an SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Making calls with VoIP and
Notification by SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
the fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SMS mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Making an external call . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Setting SMS centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SMS info services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Answering a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SMS on a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . 22
Activating/deactivating
Handsfree talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SMS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Muting the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SMS troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Dialling the emergency number . . . . 24
E-mail notifications . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operating the handset . . . . . . . . 24
Entering access data for the
Activating/deactivating the handset . 24
incoming e-mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Activating/deactivating
Opening the incoming
the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
e-mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Reverting to idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Establishing a connection,
Menu guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 going online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Correcting incorrect entries . . . . . . . . 26 Changing/checking your personal status,
going offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net . 27
Opening the buddy list . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Searching for subscribers in
Receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
the Gigaset.net directory . . . . . . . . . . 27
Writing and sending messages . . . . . . 57
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Entering, editing and deleting

Calling a buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
own entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Self-help with errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

2
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderIVZ.fm / 28.3.07

Contents

Setting the handset . . . . . . . . . . 59 Using the network mailbox . . . 71

Changing the display language . . . . . 59 Configuring the network mailbox
Setting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 for fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting the screen picture . . . . . . . . . 59 Viewing the network mailbox report . 72
Setting the display backlight . . . . . . . 60
Using several handsets . . . . . . . 72
Assigning the handset's
Registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
De-registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Activating/deactivating
Locating a handset ("paging") . . . . . . 73
auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing the base station . . . . . . . . . 73
Adjusting the loudspeaker volume . . 61
Changing a handset's internal
Changing ringer tones . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Activating/deactivating muting
Changing the name of a handset . . . . 74
of the first ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Activating/deactivating advisory
Using a handset as a room monitor . . 76
tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting the alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Restoring the handset default Configuring the phone via your PC . . . 78
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Connecting PC with
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Base station settings . . . . . . . . . . 64
Registering, setting the
Protecting against unauthorised
Web configurator language . . . . . . . . 78
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Logging off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Restoring the base station to
Structure of the Web pages . . . . . . . . 79
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Opening Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Activating/deactivating music
Setting the phone with
on hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Activating/deactivating
IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
repeater mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring telephone connections . . 83
Setting the default connection . . . . . 65
Optimising voice quality for
Updating the base station firmware . 66
VoIP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Making VoIP settings . . . . . . . . . 67 Assigning sending and
Using the connection assistant . . . . . 67 receiving numbers to handsets . . . . . 93
Changing settings without the Setting DTMF signalling for VoIP . . . . 93
connection assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Defining local communication
Setting the phone's IP address ports for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
in LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Defining dialling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Activating/deactivating display Loading/deleting directories
of VoIP status messages . . . . . . . . . . . 69 into/from the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Check the base station Saving messenger access data . . . . . . 97
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Making e-mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Defining the server for firmware
Operating the base station
updates, starting the update . . . . . . . 99
on the PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Activating/deactivating the
Setting the flashing time . . . . . . . . . . 70
automatic version check . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Activating VoIP status message
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Switching temporarily to
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
tone dialling (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

3
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderIVZ.fm / 28.3.07

Contents

Checking status information via

your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . 102
Searching for service information . . 107
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . 108
Authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Example of a menu input . . . . . . . . . 111
Example: multiple line input . . . . . . 111
Writing and editing text . . . . . . . . . . 112
Gigaset S450 IP – free software . . . . 114
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Version 4, 16.09.2005

4
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / security.fm / 28.3.07

Safety precautions

Safety precautions

Warning:
Read the safety precautions and the user guide before use.
Explain their contents and the potential hazards associated with using the telephone to your children.

$
Only use the mains adapter supplied, as indicated on the underside of the base station.

Use only recommended rechargeable batteries (page 109) of the same type!
This means that you must not use any other battery type or non-rechargeable batteries
as this could result in significant health risks and personal injury.

‹ Insert rechargeable batteries with the correct polarity, and use them in accordance with
this user guide (polarity symbols can be seen in or on the handset's battery compartment,
Πpage 7).

The operation of medical appliances may be affected. Be aware of the technical conditions
in your particular environment, e.g. a doctor's surgery.

Do not hold the rear of the handset to your ear when it is ringing or when the handsfree
function is activated. Otherwise you risk serious and permanent damage to your hearing.
The handset may cause an unpleasant humming noise in hearing aids.

Do not install the base station in bathrooms or shower rooms. The handset and base
station are not splashproof (page 102).

Do not use your phone in environments where there is a risk of an explosion

(e.g. paint shops.

If you give your Gigaset to someone else, make sure you also give them the user guide.
ƒ
All electrical and electronic equipment must be disposed of separately from general
household waste using the sites designated by local authorities.
If a product displays this symbol of a crossed-out rubbish bin, the product is subject to
European Directive 2002/96/EC.
The appropriate disposal and separate collection of used equipment serve to prevent
potential harm to the environment and to health. They are a precondition for the re-use
and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For further information on disposing of your used equipment, please contact your local
authority, your refuse collection service or the dealer you purchased the product from.
Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if the keypad lock is activated!

Please note:
Not all of the functions described in this manual are available in all countries.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

5
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

Gigaset S450 IP – more than just a telephone

Gigaset S450 IP – u Assign your own password (system

PIN) to protect your device and the
more than just a telephone Web configurator from unauthorised
access (page 64).
Your phone lets you make calls both via u Send and receive SMS messages via the
the fixed network and (cost effectively) via fixed network (page 40).
the Internet (VoIP) without using a PC. u Use instant messaging on your hand-
set. Go online and see which of your
And your phone can do much more
messenger contacts (buddies) are
besides:
online as well. Chat with your buddies,
u Press a button each time you make a send and receive text messages, or give
call to indicate whether you want to call them a call (page 52).
via the fixed network or the Internet
u Let your phone tell you, without
(page 21).
requiring a PC, about new e-mail mes-
u Register up to six handsets on your sages in your mailbox (page 49).
base station. You can use your base
u Save up to 150 numbers and names in
station to make two simultaneous calls
your handset (page 34).
using VoIP, or one call using the fixed
network and one using VoIP. u Transfer your Outlook contacts from
the PC onto your handset. Or back your
u Multiline: Set up a separate VoIP
handset directory up on your PC.
account for each member of your fam-
ily with their own VoIP phone number u You can programme the keys of your
(up to six accounts with different VoIP phone with important phone numbers.
providers). If you include your fixed The phone number is then dialled by
network number, your phone can be simply pressing the respective key
reached on up to seven different (page 35).
phone numbers. These can be ass- u Keep your hands free when making a
igned to the individual handsets. If a call. Use the handsfree function on
member of your family is called on their your handset (page 23) or use the
number, only their handset will ring. convenient headset to make calls
u Use Gigaset.net for VoIP calls. Connect (page 16, accessories, not included in
your phone to the power supply and the scope of delivery).
the Internet, and enjoy free phone calls u Make sure your phone is always up-to-
on Gigaset.net – no need to make any date. Keep yourself informed about
other settings (page 27). firmware updates on the Internet and
u Configure the phone connection for load them onto your phone (page 66).
VoIP without a PC. Your phone's con- u Use your handset as an alarm clock
nection assistant downloads general (page 63).
data about your VoIP provider from the
Internet and guides you through Your Gigaset S450 IP has a protected operating
system that offers increased security against
entering your personal data (VoIP/SIP viruses from the Internet.
account). This makes it easy for you to
start using VoIP (page 12). Have fun using your new telephone!
u If necessary, establish any further
required VoIP settings on a PC.
The phone features a Web interface
Version 4, 16.09.2005

(Web configurator) that can be

accessed via your PC's Web browser
(page 78).

6
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

VoIP – making calls via the Internet

VoIP – making calls via First steps

the Internet
Pack contents
With VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol),
your calls are not made via a fixed connec- The pack contains:
tion as in the telephone network, but u one Gigaset S450 IP base station
rather they are transmitted via the Inter-
net in the form of data packets. u one Gigaset S45 handset
u one mains adapter for the base station
You can take advantage of all the benefits
of VoIP with your phone: u one charging cradle incl. mains adapter
u You can make cost-effective calls at u one phone cord
high voice quality with subscribers on u one Ethernet cable (LAN cable)
the Internet, the fixed network or the u two batteries
mobile phone network. u one battery cover
u Your VoIP provider will give you per- u one belt clip
sonal numbers, with which you can be
u one quick guide
reached from the Internet, the fixed
network and any mobile phone net-
work. Setting up the handset for use
To be able to use VoIP, you need the fol-
lowing: The display is protected by a
plastic film. Please remove
u A broadband Internet connection
the protective film!
(e.g. DSL) with flat rate (recom-
mended) or volume-based price
u Internet access, i.e. you need a router
that will connect your phone to the Inserting the batteries
Internet. You will find a list of recom- Warning:
mended routers on the Gigaset S450 IP Use only the rechargeable batteries recom-
product page at: mended by Siemens Home and Office
http://www.siemens.com/gigaset Communication Devices GmbH & Co.KG on
page 109! This means on no account should
u Access to the services of a VoIP pro- you use conventional (non-rechargeable) bat-
vider. Open up to six accounts with teries or other battery types, otherwise serious
different VoIP providers. damage to health and property cannot be
ruled out, e.g. the outer casing of the batteries
could be destroyed or the batteries could
explode. The phone could also malfunction or
be damaged as a result of using batteries that
are not of the recommended type.

¤ Insert the batteries the right way round

(see figure).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

7
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

The polarity is indicated in/on the battery Opening the battery cover
compartment. ¤ If fitted, remove the belt clip.
¤ Place your finger in the headset socket
cavity and pull the battery cover
upwards.

The handset switches on automatically.

You will hear a confirmation tone.

Closing the battery cover

¤ First, align the notches on the side of
the battery cover with the protrusions
on the inside of the housing.
¤ Then press the cover until it clicks into
place.
Connecting the charging cradle
Connecting the charging cradle and
mounting it on the wall (if required) is
described at the end of this user guide.
¤ To charge the batteries, leave the hand-
set in the charging cradle.

Please note:
– Only place the handset in the charging cra-
dle that is intended for it.
– If the handset has switched itself off
because the batteries are flat and if it is
then placed in the charging cradle, it will
switch itself on automatically.

For questions and problems see page 102.

Version 4, 16.09.2005

8
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Initial charging and discharging of Setting the date and time

batteries
If the date and time on the phone have not
Battery charging is indicated in the top yet been set, the §Time§ display key will
right of the display by a flashing battery appear. You can use the v ¢ Ð Settings
icon e, V or U. During handset oper- ¢ Date/Time menu at a later point to enter
ation, the battery icon indicates the the date and time.
charge status of the batteries (page 1). ¤ Press §Time§ or open the menu.
The correct charge status can only be dis- ¤ Change multiple line input:
played when the batteries are first fully Date:
charged and discharged through use. Enter day, month and year in 6-digit
¤ To do this, leave the handset in the format.
charging cradle without interruption
Time:
until the battery icon stops flashing in
Enter hours and minutes as 4 digits
(e.g. Q M 1 5 for 7:15 a.m.
the display (around 13 hours).
¤ Once the batteries are fully charged, §Save§ Press the display key.
remove the handset from the charging
cradle and do not put it back again until The date and time are shown in the hand-
the batteries are fully discharged. set's idle display (page 1).

Please note: Registering the handset to the base

After the first battery charge and discharge, station
you may place your handset in the charging
cradle after every call. Your handset is registered to the base sta-
tion by default.
Please note:
Instructions on how to register further
u Always repeat the charging and dis- handsets to the base station are given on
charging procedure if you remove the page 72.
batteries from the handset and reinsert
them.
u The batteries may warm up during Installing the base station
charging. This is not dangerous.
The base station is designed for use in
u After a while the charge capacity of the closed, dry rooms with a temperature
batteries will decrease for technical rea- range of +5°C to +45°C.
sons.
¤ Place or hang the base station in a
Please note: central position in your flat or house.
You will find explanations for the symbols and
typographical conventions used in this user
Please note:
guide in the appendix, page 110. u Never expose the telephone to heat
sources, direct sunlight or other electri-
cal appliances.
u Protect your Gigaset from moisture,
dust, corrosive liquids and vapours.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

9
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Connecting the base station

In order to be able to make calls with your
phone via the fixed network and via VoIP,
you must connect the base station to
the fixed network and the Internet, see
Figure 1.

Internet
4

1
LAN

Fixed network
3
2

Figure 1 Connecting the phone to the fixed network and the Internet
1 Internet connection: Follow the steps in the order given below:
Router and modem (in picture) or
router with integrated modem 1. Connect the base station to the fixed
2 Gigaset S450 IP base station network phone port
3 Gigaset S45 handset 2. Connect the base station with the
4 PC in LAN mains power supply
3. Connect the base station with the rout-
er
Version 4, 16.09.2005

10
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Connecting the base station with the Connecting the base station with the
fixed network and the mains power router
supply
For Internet access you need a router
¤ Please connect the phone jack first and connected to the Internet via a modem
then the mains adapter, as shown (this may be integrated in the router).
below.
3
1 3

1 3

2
2

1 Side view of the base station

2 Network plug (LAN) with network cable
3 Network plug on the router
1 Phone jack with phone cord
2 Underside of the base station As soon as the cable connecting the
3 Mains adapter 230 V
phone and router is plugged in, the paging
Please note: key lights up on the front of the base
u Keep the mains adapter plugged in at station (page 1).
all times for operation, as the phone
does not work without mains connec-
You can now establish VoIP connections
tion. within Gigaset.net (page 27).
u If you buy a replacement phone cord
from a retailer, ensure that the phone
jack is connected correctly.
Correct phone jack assignment
3 4 1 unused
2 5 2 unused
6 3 a
1
4 b
5 unused
6 unused

You can now use your phone to make calls

via the fixed network and can be reached
on your fixed network number.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

11
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Making settings for VoIP As soon as the handset battery is suffi-

ciently charged, the message key f on
telephony the handset will flash (around 20 minutes
after you have put the handset in the
Before you can use the Internet (VoIP) to charging cradle). Press the message key
phone any other users on the Internet, the f to start the connection assistant.
fixed network or the mobile phone net-
work, you need the services of a VoIP pro- You will see the following display:
vider who supports the VoIP SIP standard.
Connection Assist.
Precondition: you have registered (e.g.
Start assistant
via your PC) with a suitable VoIP provider
for entry of VoIP
and set up at least one VoIP account. connection data?
The following phone settings are neces-
sary in order for you to use VoIP. You will
No Yes
receive all information from your VoIP pro-
vider.
§Yes§ Press the display key to start
u Your user name with the VoIP provider, the connection assistant.
~
if this is required by the VoIP provider
Enter the system PIN (default
u Your registration name is '0000').
u Your password with the VoIP provider
If you press §No§, the procedure that fol-
u VoIP provider general settings lows is described below.
The connection assistant will help you
with the settings. Please note:
The connection assistant will also start auto-
matically if you try to establish a connection
Starting the connection assistant via the Internet, before you have made the
Precondition: The base station is con- necessary settings.
You can also call up the connection assistant
nected to the mains power supply and a at any time via the menu (page 67).
router. Your router is connected to the
Internet (page 11).
Tip: If VoIP is activated as the default con-
nection for your phone (default setting
page 65), the phone will attempt to make
a direct connection to your VoIP provider's
server after the connection assistant is
closed. If incorrect/incomplete informa-
tion means that the connection cannot be
established, messages will be displayed
(page 14).

Please note:
Your phone is preconfigured for dynamic
assignment of the IP address. In order for your
router to 'recognise' the phone, dynamic IP
address assignment must also be activated on
the router, i.e. the router's DHCP server is acti-
Version 4, 16.09.2005

vated. Turn to page 68 to find out how to

assign your phone a static IP address if neces-
sary.

12
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Downloading VoIP provider data Entering user data for your first VoIP
account
The phone establishes a connection with
the Siemens server on the Internet. Pro- Enter the VoIP user data for the first VoIP
files with general access data for various account. Your VoIP provider will supply
VoIP providers can be downloaded here. you with this data.
After a brief period you will see the follow-
You can use the Web configurator at a later
ing display: stage to enter five further VoIP accounts (VoIP
phone numbers) that you have set up with the
same VoIP provider (page 83). Your phone
Select Country
(together with your fixed network number)
Germany can then be reached on up to seven different
England phone numbers. You can assign the phone
France numbers to the individual handsets that are
Netherlands, the registered with the base station as sending
and receiving numbers (page 93).
Ý OK
Username:
q Select country (press the con- Enter the user name and press
trol key up/down) and press §Save§ if this is required by your
§OK§. The VoIP providers availa- provider.
ble for your VoIP profile will be Authent. Name:
displayed. Enter the registration name
q Select your VoIP provider and and press §Save§.
press §OK§. Authent. Password:
The necessary general access data for your Enter password and press
VoIP provider will be downloaded and §Save§.
saved on the phone.
Please note:
If the data for your VoIP provider is not availa- Please note when making these entries that
ble for download, press the ” display key the VoIP user data is case sensitive. When you
twice. You can then carry out the following enter text, the first letter is capitalised by
steps with the connection assistant. default. If necessary, press and hold the #
You must then make the settings needed for key to switch between upper and lower case
the VoIP provider using the Web configurator and numbers.
(page 84). Your VoIP provider will supply you
with this data.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

13
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Entering your name in the Gigaset.net Completing the VoIP settings

directory
If you have made all the required entries,
With Gigaset.net you can call other the message "Connection data complete" will
Gigaset.net users directly over the Internet appear on the display. The handset returns
free of charge, without setting up an to idle status.
account with a VoIP provider and without If all the settings are correct and if the
making any further settings. You can find phone can establish a connection to the
Gigaset.net subscribers by carrying out a VoIP server, then the internal name of the
name search in the Gigaset.net(page 27) handset will be displayed (example):
directory.
The following appears in the handset's dis- Ð V
play:
INT 1
Connection Assist.

Start assistant 10.08.06 09:45

for Gigaset.net? FixedLine IP

You can now use your phone to make calls

No Yes via the fixed network and the Internet.
Callers can reach you on your fixed
§Yes§ Press the display key.
network number and your VoIP number.
Enter your Gigaset.net name:
Enter the name that you Please note:
would like to be listed under in To ensure that you can always be reached via
the Gigaset.net directory and the Internet, the router must be permanently
press §OK§. The name may con- connected to the Internet.
tain up to 25 characters.
No connection to the Internet/VoIP server
A connection to the Gigaset.net server is
established. If one of the following messages is dis-
played instead of the internal name after
If there is already an entry under this the connection assistant is closed, errors
name, you receive a message to this effect have occurred:
and you will be asked to enter a name
u Server not accessible!
again.
u Provider registration failed!
If an entry in the Gigaset.net directory is
successful, the message "Your user name is Below you will find possible causes and
successfully added to Gigaset.net!" is dis- measures you can take.
played briefly.
Server not accessible!
If the attempt to create the entry fails The phone has no connection to the Inter-
(e.g. because the phone is not connected net.
to the Internet), a message to this effect is
displayed briefly (see page 14). You can then
¤ Check the cable connection between
create the entry later via the Gigaset.net direc- the base station and the router (the
tory (see page 29). LED on the base station must light up)
and the connection between the router
and the Internet connection.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤ Check whether the phone is connected

to the LAN.

14
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

– It may not have been possible to

Please note:
dynamically assign an IP address to If port forwarding is activated on your router
the phone for the ports that have been registered as the
or SIP port (Standard 5060) and the RTP port
(Standard 5004), it makes sense to deactivate
– You have assigned a static IP address DHCP and assign the phone a static IP address
to the phone that has either already (otherwise you may not be able to hear the
been assigned to another LAN sub- other party during VoIP calls):
scriber or does not belong to the – Via the handset menu:
router's address block. v £ Ð Settings £ Base£ Local Network
¤ Find the IP address using the hand- Or
– Via the Web configurator:
set menu:
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base ¥ Open Settings £ IP Configuration
¢ Local Network (see page 68) ¥
Web page.

¤ Start the Web configurator with the

Select IP address type.
Please note that the IP address and subnet
IP address. mask depend on the router's address block.
¤ If no connection can be established, You must also enter the standard gateway and
DNS server. The IP address for the router is
change the settings on the router
generally entered here.
(activate DHCP server) or the
phone's IP address.

Provider registration failed!

u Your personal data for registering with
the VoIP provider may have been
entered incompletely or incorrectly.
¤ Check your entries for Username,
Authent. Name and Authent. Password.
In particular, check your use of
upper and lower case.
To do this, open the following menu
on your handset:
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony
¢ VoIP ¢ Provider Registr.
(see page 68)
u The server address for the VoIP server
has not yet been entered, or has been
entered incorrectly.
¤ Start the Web configurator.
¤ Open Settings ¢ Telephony
¢ Connections Web page.
¤ Edit the server address where neces-
sary
Version 4, 16.09.2005

15
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / starting.fm / 28.3.07

First steps

Belt clip and headset

By using a belt clip and headset (optional)
you can easily make your handset a con-
stant companion both inside the building
and in its immediate vicinity.

Attaching the belt clip

There are notches for attaching the belt
clip on the side of the handset at the same
height as the display.
¤ Press the belt clip onto the back of the
handset so that the protrusions on the
belt clip engage with the notches.

Connection socket for headset

You can use headsets with jack connec-
tors. The following models have been
tested and are therefore recommended:
HAMA Plantronics M40, MX100 and
MX150.
The transmission quality of other models
cannot be guaranteed.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

16
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / menuetree.fm / 28.3.07

Menu trees

Menu trees

Phone menu

Open the main menu on your phone by right-clicking on the control key when the handset
is in idle status: v.
There are two ways to select a function:

Using number combinations ('shortcut')

¤ Enter the number combination that is in front of the function in the menu tree.
Example: v 5 4 1 for 'Set handset language'.

Scrolling through the menus

¤ Scroll to the function with the control key q (press up or down) and press §OK§.

1 î Messaging
1-1 SMS An SMS mailbox (general or private) activated with- page 40
out a PIN
1-1-1 New SMS page 40
1-1-2 Incoming (0) page 42
1-1-3 Outgoing (0) page 41
An SMS mailbox activated with a PIN or 2-3
mailboxes
1-1-1 Mailbox 1-1-1-1 New SMS page 40
1-1-1-2 Incoming (0) page 42
1-1-1-3 Outgoing (0) page 41
1-1-2 Mailbox 1 1-1-2-1 New SMS page 40
to Mailbox 2 to
1-1-4 Mailbox 3 1-1-4-1
1-1-2-2 Incoming (0) page 42
to
1-1-4-2
1-1-2-3 Outgoing (0) page 41
to
1-1-4-3

1-1-5 SMS Service page 46

Version 4, 16.09.2005

17
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / menuetree.fm / 28.3.07

Menu trees

1-1-6 Settings 1-1-6-1 Service Centres page 46

1-1-6-2 SMS Mailboxes page 45
1-1-6-3 Notify Number page 44
1-1-6-4 Notify Type page 44
1-1-6-5 Status Report page 41

1-2 E-mail 1-2-1 Inbox (0) page 50

1-2-2 Settings 1-2-2-1 Incoming (POP3) page 49
1-2-2-2 Registration page 49

1-3 Messenger 1-3-1 Buddies page 55

1-3-2 User Status 1-3-2-1 Change Status page 54
1-3-2-2 Info page 54

1-3-3 Messages page 56

2 ê Sel. Services
2-1 VoIP 2-1-6 Call Divert page 32
2-1-7 Call Waiting page 32

2-2 Fixed Line 2-2-6 Call Divert page 30

2-2-7 Call Waiting page 30

2-3 Ringback Off page 31

3 ì Alarm Clock page 63

4 í Add. Features
4-3 Room Monitor page 76
Version 4, 16.09.2005

18
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / menuetree.fm / 28.3.07

Menu trees

5 Ð Settings
5-1 Date/Time page 9
5-2 Audio Settings 5-2-1 Ringer Settings 5-2-1-1 Ext. Calls page 61
5-2-1-2 Internal Calls
5-2-1-3 All

5-2-2 Advisory Tones page 62

5-3 Display 5-3-1 Screen Picture page 59

5-3-2 Colour Scheme page 59
5-3-3 Contrast page 59
5-3-4 Backlight page 60

5-4 Handset 5-4-1 Language page 59

5-4-2 Auto Answer page 61
5-4-3 Register H/Set page 72
5-4-4 Select Base page 73
5-4-5 Reset Handset page 63

5-5 Base 5-5-1 Calls List Type 5-5-1-1 Missed Calls page 38
5-5-1-2 All Calls

5-5-2 Music on hold page 65

5-5-3 System PIN page 64
5-5-4 Base Reset page 64
5-5-5 Add. Features 5-5-5-1 Repeater Mode page 65

5-5-6 Local Network page 68

5-5-8 Software Update page 66

5-6 Voice Mail 5-6-1 Set Key 1 5-6-1-1 Network Mailb. page 71
Version 4, 16.09.2005

19
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / menuetree.fm / 28.3.07

Menu trees

5-7 Telephony 5-7-1 Default Line 5-7-1-1 VoIP page 65

5-7-1-2 Fixed Line

5-7-2 Connection Assist. page 67

5-7-4 Area Code
5-7-6 Fixed Line 5-7-6-2 Recall page 70

5-7-7 VoIP 5-7-7-1 Show Stat. on HS page 69

5-7-7-2 Select Provider page 67
5-7-7-3 Provider Registr. page 68

Web configurator menu

Home page 78
Settings
IP Configuration page 82
Telephony
Connections page 83
Audio page 90
Number Assignment page 93
Dialing Plans page 94
Telephone Directory page 95
Advanced Settings page 93
Messaging
Messenger page 97
E-Mail page 98
Miscellaneous page 99 to
page 100
Status
Device page 101
Version 4, 16.09.2005

20
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network

Making calls with VoIP and Please note:

If you use a different GAP-compatible handset
the fixed network to the Gigaset S45, all calls will be made via the
default connection, even if you press and hold
the talk key c. If you want to use the non-
default connection to make a call, enter a star
Making an external call (*) at the end of the number.

External calls are calls made via the public Selecting the connection type using
telephone network (fixed network) or via display keys and making a call
the Internet (VoIP). You determine what Precondition: The display keys on your
type of connection you want to use when handset are assigned to §FixedLine§ and/or §IP§
you dial. (default setting for the Gigaset S45).
§FixedLine§ / §IP§
Please note:
Press the display key to select
– You can use your base station to make two
simultaneous external calls (on two hand-
the connection type.
sets): two calls using VoIP or one call each ~s Enter the number or select
using VoIP and fixed network. from the directory.
c / d Press the talk or handsfree key.
– You can define which of your VoIP phone
numbers (VoIP account) are used for outgo-
ing external VoIP calls via the handset The number will be called via the selected
(Number Assignment, page 93). connection type, regardless of whether
– If you use VoIP to make a call to the fixed the talk key was pressed briefly or pressed
network, you may also have to dial the area
and held.
code for local calls (depending on the VoIP
provider).
Entering an IP address
You can also enter the dialling code in
the configuration so you do not always You can also dial an IP address instead of a
need to enter it for local calls (Dialing Plans, phone number using VoIP.
page 94). It will then be inserted automati-
cally for local calls.
¤ Press the star key * to separate the
sections of the IP address
Use the talk key to select the type of (e.g. 149*246*122*28).
connection and make the call ¤ If necessary press the # key to attach
~c
the SIP port number of the person you
are calling to the IP address (e.g.
Enter number/IP address and
149*246*122*28#5060).
briefly press/press and hold
the talk key.
Please note:
A default connection is established on – Dialling with the directory (page 34) or last
your phone (fixed network or VoIP, number redial list (page 37) saves repeated
page 65). keying of phone numbers.
¤ Briefly press the talk key c if you – You can assign a number from the directory
to a key for quick dialling (page 35).
want to make a call via this default con-
– You can edit or add to any phone number
nection. selected via speed dial or from the directory
¤ Press and hold the talk key c if you and use it for the current call.
want to make the call via the other con-
nection type.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

21
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network

Cancelling the dialling operation Calling Line Identification

You can cancel the dialling operation with
the end call key a.
When you receive a call from the Internet,
the caller's number and/or the name they
have specified is displayed on the screen.
Ending a call When you receive a call from the fixed net-
work, the caller's number is displayed on
a Press the end call key. the screen if the following conditions are
met:
Answering a call u Your fixed network provider supports
CLIP, CLI:
The handset indicates an incoming call in – CLI (Calling Line Identification):
three ways: by ringing, by a display on the number of the caller is transmitted
screen and by the flashing handsfree key
d.
– CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation): the caller's number is
displayed.
Please note:
Only calls to receiving numbers that are u You have arranged CLIP with your net-
assigned to your handset will be signalled work provider.
(page 93). u The caller has arranged CLI with the
If a phone number is not assigned to any network provider.
handset as a receiving number, the calls will
be signalled on all handsets. If the phone number is identified and the
caller's number is saved in your directory,
You can accept the call by: the name will be displayed from the direc-
¤ Pressing the talk key c. tory.
¤ Pressing the display key §Accept§.
¤ Pressing the handsfree key d. Call display
If the handset is in the charging cradle and You can use the display to decide whether
the Auto Answer function is activated the call is for your fixed network number
(page 61), the handset will take a call or your VoIP number.
automatically when you lift it out of the

Å
cradle. Calls to your fixed network number
If the ringer tone is intrusive, press the
§Silence§ display key. You can accept the call
1
so long as it is displayed on the screen.

1234567890 2

for Fixed network 3

Accept Silence

1 Ringer tone icon

2 Number or name of caller
3 Display of the receiving number: the name is
displayed that you have assigned to your
fixed network number (page 89).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

22
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network

Å
Calls to your VoIP number Handsfree talking
In handsfree mode, instead of holding the
1 handset to your ear you can put it down,
e.g. on the table in front of you, to allow
IP: 1234567890 2 others to participate in the call.

for Anna 3 Activating/deactivating handsfree

Accept Silence mode
1 Ringer tone icon
2 Number or name of caller
Activating while dialling
3 Receiving number: indicates which of your ~d Enter number and press
VoIP phone numbers the caller has dialled. briefly/press and hold the
You assign the names when you enter the
VoIP phone numbers into the phone handsfree key to select the
(page 85). For calls from Gigaset.net, connection type (page 21).
for Gigaset.net is displayed. ¤ You should inform your caller before
Display when Calling Line Identification is you use the handsfree function so that
withheld they know someone else is listening.

For calls from the fixed network, the caller Switching between earpiece and
can withhold calling line identification or handsfree mode
not request it. In this case the number is ¤ Press the handsfree key d to activate
not displayed. The following is displayed or deactivate handsfree talking during
in place of the number: a call.
u External, if no number is transmitted. If you wish to place the handset in the
u Withheld, if the caller has withheld Call- charging cradle during a call:
ing Line Identification. ¤ Press and hold the handsfree key d
u Unavailable, if the caller has not while placing the handset in the charg-
arranged Calling Line Identification. ing cradle. If the handsfree key d
does not light up, press the key again.
For how to adjust the loudspeaker vol-
ume, see page 61.

Muting the handset

You can deactivate the microphone in
your handset during an external call.
Your caller will hear hold music, if acti-
vated (page 65).

Muting the handset

u Press the control key on the
left to mute the handset.

Cancelling muting
”/a
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Press the display key or the

end call key to cancel the mut-
ing.

23
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Operating the handset

Dialling the emergency number ¤ Open the following Web page: Settings
¢ Telephony ¢ Dialing Plans.
The default setting for your phone is that ¤ Enter your emergency numbers in the
all numbers that are saved as emergency fields in the Emergency Numbers area.
numbers are automatically dialled using Change previously entered emergency
the fixed network. The selected connec- numbers.
tion type (Internet or fixed network) is ¤ Click on Set to save the settings.
irrelevant for dialling.
You can deactivate this function using the
phone's Web configurator (see dialling Operating the handset
rules, page 95), e.g. if you use the phone
without a fixed network. However, you
should ask beforehand, whether your VoIP Activating/deactivating the
provider supports emergency numbers.
Emergency numbers have been preset in
handset
your phone. You can use the Web configu- a Press and hold the end call
rator to display these, enter more emer- key.
gency numbers or edit them (page 95).
You will hear the confirmation tone.
Please note:
– If you have used the Web configurator to Activating/deactivating
deactivate the Emergency calls always via
fixed line function and have entered an the keypad lock
automatic area code for VoIP calls
(page 94), the area code will also be pre- # Press and hold the hash key.
fixed to the emergency numbers when
they are dialled via VoIP. You will hear the confirmation tone. The
– Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if Ø icon appears in the display when the
the key lock is activated. Before dialling, keypad lock is activated.
press and hold the hash key #, to
release the key lock.
The keypad lock deactivates automatically
when you receive a call and activates
again after the call.
Setting emergency numbers
You can save up to four emergency num- Please note:
bers on your phone. The default setting The handset displays an advisory message if
you press a key by accident while the keypad
for your phone is that these emergency lock is on. To deactivate the keypad lock, press
numbers are always dialled via the fixed and hold the hash key #.
network – irrespective of which connec-
tion type you select. The fixed network
always supports general emergency num-
bers (e.g. establishing connection to the
local police emergency number).
You can deactivate the setting for the
emergency numbers to always be dialled
via the fixed network.
You can enter or change emergency num-
Version 4, 16.09.2005

bers on the Dialing Plans Web page in the

Web configurator.

24
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Operating the handset

Control key t Adjust loudspeaker volume for

earpiece and handsfree mode.

Display keys
The current display functions are shown in
the bottom display line in reversed high-
In this user guide, the side of the control lights. The function of the display keys
key that you must press in the given oper- changes depending on the particular
ating situation is shown in black (top, bot- operating situation.
tom). Example: t for 'press up on the Example:
control key'.
The control key has a number of different
functions:
FixedLine IP 1
When the handset is in idle status
s Press and release to open the
handset directory. 2
Press and hold to open the list
of available online directories
(e.g. Gigaset.net directory). 1 Current display key functions are shown in
v
the bottom display line.
Open main menu. 2 Display keys
u Open list of handsets. The most important display symbols are:
t Adjust the ringer volume of §§§§§Menu§§§§ Open the main menu.
the handset (page 61).
§Options§ Open a context-dependent
In lists and menus menu.
t/ s Scroll up/down line by line. W Delete key: deletes one char-
v Open submenu or confirm acter at a time from right to
selection. left.
u Go back one menu level or Î Go back one menu level or
cancel. cancel operation.
Ó Copy number into directory.
•
In an input field
Open the last number redial
You can use the control key to move the list.
cursor up t, down s, right v or
left u.

During an external call

s Press and release to open the
handset directory.
Press and hold to open the list
of available online directories
(e.g. Gigaset.net directory).
u
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Initiate an internal consulta-

tion call.

25
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

Operating the handset

Reverting to idle status Submenus

The functions in the submenus are dis-
You can revert to idle status from any-
played as lists.
where in the menu as follows:
¤ Press and hold the end call key a. To access a function:
¤ Scroll to the function with the control
key q and press §OK§.
Or:
¤ Do not press any key: after 2 minutes Or:
the display will automatically revert to
idle status. ¤ Enter the number combination that is
in front of the function in the menu
Changes that you have not confirmed or
tree (page 17).
saved by pressing §OK§, §Yes§, §Save§, §Send§ or
Save Entry §OK§ will be lost. Briefly press the end call key a once to
return to the previous menu level / cancel
You can find an example of the display in
the operation.
idle status on page 1.

Menu guidance Correcting incorrect entries

You can correct incorrect characters in the
Your telephone's functions are accessed
text by navigating to the incorrect entry
using a menu that has a number of levels.
using the control key. You can then:
u Press X to delete the character to the
Main menu (first menu level)
left of the cursor.
¤ To open the main menu, press v with u Insert new character to the left of the
the handset in idle status. cursor.
The main menu functions are shown in u When entering the time and date etc.,
the display as a list with icon and name. edit the flashing character.
Accessing a function You will find examples of symbols used,
¤ Scroll to the function with the control menu entries and multiple line input in the
key q and press §OK§. appendix to this user guide, page 110.
Or:
¤ Enter the number that is in front of the
function in the menu tree (page 17).
The corresponding submenu (the next
menu level) is opened.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

26
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net

VoIP telephony via Please note:

If you do not use your Gigaset.net connection
Gigaset.net for six weeks, it is automatically deactivated.
You cannot be reached for calls from the
Gigaset.net.
You can use Gigaset.net to make free The connection is reactivated:
phone calls via the Internet directly to – as soon as you start a search in the
other Gigaset.net users, without having to Gigaset.net directory or
set up an account with a VoIP provider or – make a call via the Gigaset.net (dial a
make any further settings! You simply number with #9 at the end) or
have to connect your phone to the power – activate the connection via the Web config-
supply and the Internet connection and, if urator (page 89).
necessary, enter yourself in the
Gigaset.net online directory under a name Searching for subscribers in
of your choice (page 14/page 29).
Gigaset net is a VoIP service provided by
the Gigaset.net directory
Siemens Home and Office Communica-
Your handset is in idle status. A VoIP con-
tion Devices GmbH und Co KG, which is
nection is free.
available to all users with a Gigaset VoIP
device. s Press and hold.
You can call other subscribers to q If necessary select Gigaset.net
Gigaset.net free of charge, i.e. there are from the list of available
no telephone charges other than the costs online directories and press
for your Internet connection. Connections §OK§.
to/from other networks are not possible.
Please note:
Every Gigaset VoIP device is assigned a – Calls to the Gigaset.net directory are always
Gigaset.net phone number by default free of charge.
(page 107). – You can also open the Gigaset.net directory
All registered subscribers are included in by dialling 1188#9 (phone number of the
Gigaset.net directory) and pressing the talk
key c. Alternatively, create a new direc-
the Gigaset.net directory, which you are
able to access. tory entry with this number.

Exclusion of liability Or (when the handset is in idle status):

11NN#O
Gigaset.net is a voluntary service provided by
Siemens Home and Office Communication
GmbH & Co KG with no liability or guarantee Enter the number (1188#9).
for the availability of the network. This service c / d Press the talk or handsfree key.
can be terminated at any time with a notice
period of three months. The connection to the Gigaset.net direc-
tory is always made using VoIP.
If no connection can be made to the
Gigaset.net directory, an error message
will be sent and the handset will go into
idle status.
If the connection can be made, you will be
prompted to enter a name/partial name
that you want to search for: Please enter
Version 4, 16.09.2005

search name.

27
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net

¤ Enter the name or partial name and Viewing the subscriber's number
press §OK§. q Select the subscriber from the
A hit list will be displayed of all the names hit list.
that begin with the specified character §View§ Press the display key.
string (abbreviated if necessary).
The Gigaset.net number and name of the
If no matching entry is found, you will be subscriber will be shown in full, if neces-
asked again to enter a name. sary using more than one line.
You can scroll through the hit list with q.
Once the connection has been estab- Please note:
lished, you will be asked to enter a name – Connections to Gigaset.net are always
established via VoIP, irrespective of which
that you want to search for. default connection is set on your phone.
Nickname: Pressing and holding c or pressing it
Enter the name or part of a briefly and a "*" at the end of the number
name (max. 25 characters). have no effect.
– You can open the Gigaset.net directory and
§Options§ Press the display key. establish connections, even if you have not
Start search entered yourself in the Gigaset.net direc-
Select and press §OK§. tory.

If the search has been successful, a hit list

will be displayed of all the names that
Using other functions
begin with the specified character string. Precondition: the hit list is displayed.
You can scroll through the hit list with q. q (select entry) ¢ §Options§
If it has not been possible to find a match- The following functions can be selected
ing entry, a corresponding message is dis- with q:
played. You have the following options: Add to directory
¤ Press the display key §New§ to start a new Copy the number to the handset direc-
search. tory. The number and name (where
Or appropriate abbreviated, max. 16 char-
¤ Press the display key §Change§ to change acters) are copied to the directory.
¤ Edit and save entry where appropri-
the search criteria. The previously
entered name is copied and can be ate (page 34).
edited. New search
Start a search with a new name
If there are too many matching entries in (page 28).
the Gigaset.net directory, the message Too
many entries found! is displayed instead of a Own details
hit list. See "Entering, editing and deleting
¤ Press the display key §Detail§ to start a own entry" on page 29.
refined search. The previously entered Note:
name is copied and can be edited/ If you dial a Gigaset.net number from the local
expanded. directory, the connection is automatically
established via VoIP.
Calling subscribers
qc Select the subscriber from the
Version 4, 16.09.2005

hit list and press the talk key.

28
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / telephony.fm / 28.3.07

VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net

Entering, editing and deleting Calling a Gigaset.net subscriber

own entry You can call a Gigaset.net subscriber
directly via the Gigaset.net directory (see
You have the following options:
above) or via their Gigaset.net number:
u Edit the name of your entry in the
Gigaset.net directory ~ /s Enter the Gigaset.net number
(including the #9) or select
u Delete your entry from the directory from the handset directory.
c
u If you did not enter a name when using
Press the talk key.
the phone for the first time (page 14),
specify a name and enter yourself in The connection will always be established
the directory. via VoIP. Every number ending with #9 is
dialled via Gigaset.net.
Viewing own entry
You are connected to the Gigaset.net
directory:
¤ Select §Options§ ¢ Own details and press
§OK§.

Your Gigaset.net number and, where

applicable, your currently entered name
are displayed.

Entering/editing a name
§Edit§ Press the display key.
~ Edit name or enter new name
(max. 25 characters) and press
§OK§.
You can delete the name with
X.
If there is not yet an entry with this name
in the Gigaset.net directory, the name is
saved. A message to this effect is dis-
played. The handset switches to idle sta-
tus.
If there is already an entry with this name
or if the entered name contains impermis-
sible characters, you will be requested to
enter a different name.

Note:
If you delete the name, your entry will be
deleted from the directory. You are no longer
'visible' to other Gigaset.net subscribers. How-
ever, you can still be reached via your
Gigaset.net number. For information on how
to display the number, see page 107.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

29
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / netservices_SAG.fm / 28.3.07

Network services – fixed network

Network services – Activating/deactivating call waiting

If call waiting is activated, a caller on the
fixed network fixed network will hear the ringing tone if
you are already conducting a phone con-
The following network services can only versation using your fixed network con-
be used for making calls via the fixed net- nection. This call is announced acousti-
work. cally and visually on your handset screen.
Network services are functions that your Calls on the VoIP connection are not
network provider makes available to you. shown as call waiting. They are signalled
You have to request these services from on other registered handsets. If no other
your network provider. handset is available, the caller will hear
¤ If you require assistance, please con- the busy tone.
tact your network provider. Accepting/rejecting call waiting, see
page 31.
Settings for all calls v ¢ ê Sel. Services ¢ Fixed Line
¢ Call Waiting
If you have completed one of the follow- Status: Activate/deactivate.
ing procedures, a code is sent.
¤ After confirmation from the telephone ¤ Press the display key §Send§.
network, press the end call key a. ¤ Press the end call key a after the
announcement from the telephone
You can set the following features: network.

General call forwarding Please note:

v ¢ ê Sel. Services ¢ Fixed Line
The setting does not affect the procedure for

¢ Call Divert
call waiting on the VoIP connection. For how to
activate/deactivate call waiting for the VoIP
¤ Change multiple line input: connection, see page 30.

When:
Select All Calls / No Answer / When Busy.
Call No.:
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the
number to which the call is to be
diverted, and press Save. You can enter
a fixed network (fixed line), VoIP or
mobile number.
Status:
Activating/deactivating call forwarding.
¤ Press the display key §Send§.
¤ Press the end call key a after the
announcement from the telephone
network.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

30
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / netservices_SAG.fm / 28.3.07

Network services – fixed network

Functions during a call Accepting a waiting call

Precondition: Call waiting is activated
Initiate ringback (page 30).
You hear the busy tone. §Accept§ Press the display key.
§Options§ ¢ Ringback Or: if the caller's number is not trans-
a
ferred:
Press the end call key.
§Options§ ¢ Accept waiting call
Consultation You have the option of toggling or holding
During a call: a conference call.
§Ext.Call§ Press the display key. Please note:
~ Enter a number or copy it from – Without CLIP a waiting call is only
announced with a beep.
the directory and press §OK§.
– If the first call was an internal call, the inter-
The number will be dialled via the fixed nal connection is ended.
network connection. – An internal call waiting is shown on the dis-
play. You can neither accept the internal
Please note: call nor reject it.
After a few seconds, the number selected for a
consultation call is saved in the last number Rejecting a waiting call
redial list.
§Options§ ¢ Reject waiting call
You have the following options:
u Toggling: Functions after a call
¤ Use q to toggle between the par-
ticipants. Cancelling ringback
– End call with active participant: v ¢ ê Sel. Services ¢ Ringback Off
§Options§ End Active Call.
If you have cancelled the ringback, a code
u Conference call: is sent.
– Call both subscribers: press the dis- ¤ After confirmation from the telephone
play key §Conf.§. network, press the end call key a.
– End the conference call (toggling):
press display key §EndConf§.
– End call with both participants: Press
the end call key a.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

31
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / netservices_SAG.fm / 28.3.07

Network services – VoIP

Network services – VoIP Activate/deactivate call waiting

If call waiting is activated, a caller on one
You can use the following network serv- of your VoIP connections will hear the
ices to make calls via the VoIP connection. ringing tone if you are already on a call
using this VoIP connection. This call is
announced acoustically and visually on
Settings for all calls your handset screen.
Calls on the fixed network connection are
General call forwarding not signalled as call waiting. They are sig-
v ¢ ê Sel. Services ¢ VoIP
nalled on other registeredhandsets, to
¢ Call Divert which the fixed network number has been
allocated as a receiving number. If no
A list of your phone's configured and other handset is available, the caller will
activated VoIP phone numbers will be dis- hear the busy tone.
played. VoIP phone numbers for which
Accepting/rejecting call waiting, see
call diversion is activated are identified
with ½.
page 33.
v ¢ ê Sel. Services ¢ VoIP
¤ Select the VoIP phone number for ¢ Call Waiting
which you want to activate or deacti-
vate call diversion, and press §OK§. Status: Activate/deactivate.
¤ Change multiple line input: ¤ Press the display key §Save§.
When:
Please note:
All Calls / No Answer / When Busy. The setting applies to all VoIP phone numbers.
Call No.: It does not affect the procedure for call waiting
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the on the fixed network connection. For how to
number to which the call is to be activate/deactivate call waiting for the fixed
network connection, see page 32.
diverted, and press Save. You can enter
a fixed network, VoIP or mobile
number.
Status:
Activating/deactivating call forwarding.
¤ Press the display key §Save§.
Please note that call diversion may incur addi-
tional costs. Ask your VoIP provider.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

32
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / netservices_SAG.fm / 28.3.07

Network services – VoIP

Functions during a call Accepting a waiting call

Precondition: Call waiting is activated
Consultation (page 30).
During a call: §Accept§ Press the display key.
§Ext.Call§ Press the display key. You have the option of toggling or holding
~c
a conference call.
Enter the number or transfer
from the directory and press Please note:
talk key c. – If the first call was an internal call, the inter-
The number will be dialled via the hand- nal connection is ended.
set's VoIP sending number. – An internal call waiting is shown on the dis-
play. You can neither accept the internal
.
Please note: call nor reject it.
After a few seconds, the number selected for a
consultation call is saved in the last number
redial list.

If the participant answers, you have the

following options:
u Toggling:
¤ Use q to toggle between the par-
ticipants.
– End call with active participant:
§Options§ End Active Call.
u Conference call:
– Call both participants:
press the display key §Conf.§.
– End the conference call (toggling):
press display key §EndConf§.
– End call with both participants:
press the end call key a.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

33
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Using the directory and lists

Using the directory and lists Storing a number in the directory

s ¢ New Entry
The options are: ¤ Change multiple line input:
u Directory/call-by-call list Number :
u If applicable, online directories Enter number.
u Last number redial list Name :
u SMS, e-mail and messenger list Enter name.
u Calls list Annivers.:
You can store a maximum of 150 entries Enter anniversary if required (page 36).
in the directory and call-by-call list (the Speed Dial:
actual number depends on the size of Select number key for speed dial.
the individual entries). Each of the keys 2 to O can be
You create the directory and call-by-call assigned one number from the direc-
list for your own individual handset. How- tory. The number is then dialled by sim-
ever, you can send the lists or individual ply pressing a key (page 35). Insert a
entries to other handsets (page 36). hash (#) at the end of the number, if
the number is to be dialled via the
default connection (page 65).
Directory/call-by-call list
¤ Save changes (page 112).
In the directory you store numbers and
corresponding names. Please note:
¤ With the handset in idle status, open – To find out how to enter IP addresses, turn
the directory by pressing the s key.
to page 21.
– If you add a star (*) at the end of the
The call-by-call list is used to store access number, the number will be dialled via the
codes for network providers (called 'call- non-standard connection (page 65), even
by-call numbers'), that can be put ahead if you press and release the c talk key.
– You can use the Web configurator to save
of the numbers when dialling via the fixed
the directory to a file on your PC, where it
network. can be edited and then sent back to the
¤ Open the call-by-call list in idle status handset (page 95). Or you can transfer
by pressing the C key. Outlook contacts from the PC to the hand-
set's directory.
Length of an entry
Number: max. 32 digits Storing a number in the call-by-call list
C ¢ New Entry
Name: max. 16 characters

Please note: ¤ Change multiple line input:

– Some VoIP providers do not support local Number :
calls for calls to the fixed network. In this Enter number.
case, always enter the fixed network
number with the area code in your direc- Name :
tory. Enter name.
Alternatively, you can also use the Web
configurator to define an area code, which
is automatically prefixed to all numbers
that are dialled without an area code for
Version 4, 16.09.2005

calls via VoIP (page 94).

– You can assign a number from the directory
to a key for quick dialling (page 35).

34
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Using the directory and lists

Selecting entries in the directory and Delete Entry

call-by-call list Delete selected entry.

s / C Open directory or call-by-call

VIP Entry (directory only)
Mark a directory entry as VIP (Very
list.
Important Person) and assign it a par-
You have the following options: ticular ringer tone. You can then iden-
u Use q to scroll to the entry until the tify VIP calls by their ringer tones.
required name is selected. Precondition: Calling Line Identifica-
u Enter the first character of the name, or tion (page 22).
scroll to the entry with q. Copy Entry
Send a single entry to a handset
Dialling with the directory/call-by-call (page 36).
list Delete List
s / C ¢ q (Select entry; page 35) Delete all entries in the directory or in
c
the call-by-call list.
Briefly press/press and hold
the talk key. The number is Copy List
dialled using the selected con- Send complete list to a handset
nection type (page 21). (page 36).
Available Memory
Please note: Display the available entries in the
You can only dial IP addresses via VoIP. directory and call-by-call list.

Managing directory/call-by-call list Using speed dial keys

entries
¤ Press and hold the required speed dial
s/C ¢ q (Select entry; page 35) key (page 34).
Viewing entries If a hash (#) is placed at the end of the
relevant phone number, the number will
§View§ Press the display key. The be dialled via the standard connection;
entry is displayed. otherwise, it is always dialled via the non-
Back with §OK§. standard connection (page 65).
Editing entries
Press display keys one after the
§View§ §Edit§
other.
¤ Carry out changes and save.

Using other functions

s/C ¢ q (Select entry; page 35)
§Options§ Open menu.
The following functions can be selected
with q:
Display Number
Change or add to a saved number and
then dial it (press talk key c ).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Edit Entry
Edit selected entry.

35
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Using the directory and lists

Sending the directory/call-by-call list Saving an anniversary in the directory

to another handset
You can save an anniversary for every
number in the directory and specify a time
Preconditions:
when you will receive a reminder call on
u The sending and receiving handsets the anniversary.
s ¢ s (Select entry; page 35)
must both be registered on the same
base station.
u The other handset can send and receive §View§ §Edit§
directory entries. Press display keys one after the
s / C ¢ q (Select entry; page 35)
other.
¢ §Options§ ¢ Copy Entry / Copy List s Scroll to the Annivers.: line.
~ Enter the internal number of §Edit§ Press the display key.
the receiving handset. You see ¤ Change multiple line input:
Copying entry. Date:
A successful transfer is confirmed by a Enter the day/month in 4-digit format.
message and confirmation tone on the Time:
receiving handset. Enter the hour/minute for the reminder
If you have sent a single entry, you can call in 4-digit format.
transfer another entry with §Yes§. Prompt:
Select the type of signal for the
Please note: reminder and press §OK§.
u Entries with identical numbers are not
overwritten in the receiver handset.
¤ Save changes (page 112).
u The transfer is cancelled if the phone Please note:
rings or if the memory of the receiving A time must be specified for reminder calls. If
you select a visual signal, a time is not required
handset is full. and is automatically set to 00.00.

Copying a displayed number to the Deleting anniversaries

directory s ¢ s (Select entry; page 35)
You can copy numbers displayed in a list, §View§ §Edit§
e.g. the calls list or the last number redial Press display keys one after the
list, in an SMS or during a call to the direc- other.
s
tory.
Scroll to the Annivers.: line.
A number is displayed:
§Edit§ §Delete§ §Save§
§Options§ ¢ Copy to Directory Press display keys one after the
¤ Complete the entry, see page 34. other.

Reminder call on an anniversary

Copying a number from the directory
A reminder call is signalled on the handset
You can open the directory in many oper- using the selected ringer tone.
ating situations e.g. to copy a number.
§Off§ Press the display key to stop
Your handset need not be in idle status.
the reminder call.
¤ Depending on the operating situation,
open the directory with s or Ò.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

q Select an entry (page 35).

36
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Using the directory and lists

Last number redial list Opening lists with the

The last number redial list contains the ten message key
You can use the message key f to open
numbers last dialled with the handset
(max. 32 numbers). If one of the numbers
the following lists:
is in the directory, the corresponding
name will be displayed. u SMS list
If several mailboxes are set up
Dialling from the last number redial list (page 45), several lists will be dis-
played, if required.
c Press the key briefly. u Incoming e-mail list
q Select an entry. The list is only shown if new messages
c Briefly press/press and hold have arrived in the mailbox for the
the talk key. The number is incoming e-mail server.
dialled using the selected con- u Messenger message list
nection type (page 21). The list is only shown on the handset
When a name is displayed, you can display that is online.
the corresponding phone number by u Configuring the Network mailbox
pressing the §View§ display key. If your network provider supports this
function and the network mailbox is
Managing entries in the last number configured for fast access (page 71).
redial list u Calls list
c Press the key briefly. An advisory tone sounds as soon as a new
q Select an entry. message arrives in a list. The f key
flashes (it goes off when the key is
§Options§ Open menu.
pressed). In idle status, the displays shows
The following functions can be selected an icon for the new message.
with q: Icon New message...
Ã
Display Number (as in the directory,
... in the network mailbox
page 35)
Copy to Directory Á ... in calls list
Copying a displayed number to the À ... in the SMS, messenger or e-
directory (page 36). mail list
Delete Entry
The number of new entries is shown
Delete selected entry.
beneath the corresponding icon.
Pressing the f button will only display
Delete List
Delete complete list.
lists that contain messages (with the
exception of the network mailbox). Lists
with new messages are shown first and
identified in bold. The number of mes-
sages received in each are shown in brack-
ets. If a list contains no new messages, the
number of old messages will be shown.
Select a list with q. To open, press §OK§.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

37
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Using the directory and lists

Please note: Setting the calls list type

If calls are saved in the network mailbox you v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base
will receive a message if the appropriate set-
tings have been made (see the network mail- ¢ Calls List Type
box instructions of your network provider). Missed Calls / All Calls
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
Incoming SMS list a Press and hold (idle status).
All received SMS messages are saved in The calls list entries are retained when you
the incoming message list, see page 42. change the list type.

Calls list Opening the calls list

Precondition: Calling Line Identification f ¢ Calls List: (2)
(CLIP, page 22). q Select entry.
Depending on the type of list set, the calls The last incoming call is displayed in the
list contains calls list.
u all incoming (marked with ½) and out-
going calls List entry
u missed calls only
New messages are on top.
The numbers of the last 30 calls are saved.
Example of list entries:
Multiple calls from the same number will
be stored once in the list of missed calls All Calls
(the latest call). The number of calls from Susi Sorglos
this number is shown in brackets after the 29/08/06 12:20 ½
entry. Louise Miller
29.08.06 11:15
Multiple calls from the same number are
**************************
stored several times in the list of answered
calls. Delete Options

Please note:
Only calls to the receiving numbers assigned to u List type (in header)
your handset are stored in the calls list u Status of entry
(page 93). Bold: new entry
If no receiving numbers are assigned, all calls
will be stored in the calls list for all handsets. u Number or name of caller
You can add the caller's number to the
directory (page 36).
u Date and time of call (if set, page 9)
u Type of entry:
– answered calls (½)
– missed calls
Pressing the display key §Delete§ deletes the
marked entry.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

38
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / directories_charges.fm / 28.3.07

Making cost-effective calls

Managing entries in the calls list Making cost-effective calls

After pressing the display key §Options§ you
can select more functions with q: Using the Internet (VoIP) is the preferred
Copy to Directory cost-effective way of making calls. If you
Copying a displayed number to the make calls via the fixed network, select a
directory. network provider who offers very low call
Information charges (call-by-call) or have the call
If a URI was received and stored for a duration displayed on your handset after
VoIP call, this will be shown. The URI is the call. You can manage call-by-call num-
dialled if you press the talk key c. bers in the call-by-call list
The URI is not entered on the last
number redial list. Displaying the call duration
Delete List
Delete complete list. The duration of a call is displayed
When you leave the calls list all entries are u during the conversation,
set to the status 'old', i.e. the next time you u until about three seconds after the call
call the list up they will no longer be has ended if you do not replace the
shown in bold. handset in the charging cradle.

Selecting from the calls list Please note:

The actual duration of the call can vary from
f ¢ Calls List: (2) that shown by a few seconds.
q Select entry.
c Briefly press/press and hold Linking call-by-call numbers
the talk key. The number is with a number
dialled using the selected con-
nection type (page 21). You can insert the dialling code of a
network provider ahead of the number
('linking').
C Open call-by-call list.
s Select entry (call-by-call
number).
§Options§ Press the display key.
Display Number
Select and press §OK§.
~ / s Enter number or dial number
from the directory (page 36).
c Press the talk key. Both num-
bers are dialled.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

39
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

SMS (text messages) Please note:

u Each incoming SMS is signalled by a
You can only send and receive SMS mes- single ring (ringer tone as for external
sages via the fixed network. calls). If you accept an SMS 'call', the
SMS will be lost. To prevent this ring,
When an SMS is sent, the base station suppress the first ringer tone for all
automatically establishes a connection via external calls (page 62).
the fixed network.
u If your phone is connected to a PABX,
Your unit is supplied ready for sending please read page 47.
SMS messages immediately. u To receive text messages you must be
Preconditions: registered with your service provider.
u Calling Line Identification is enabled for
your fixed network connection. Writing/sending an SMS
u Your network provider supports SMS in
the fixed network (information on this Writing an SMS
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS
can be obtained from your network
provider).
Mailbox 2 Select mailbox if necessary
u You are registered with your service
and press §OK§ (page 45).
provider to send and receive SMS mes-
sages. ~ Enter mailbox PIN if necessary
and press §OK§.
SMS messages are exchanged between
SMS centres that are operated by service New SMS Select and press §OK§.
providers. You must enter the SMS centre ~ Write an SMS.
through which you wish to send and §Options§ Press the display key.
receive SMS messages into your phone.
You can receive SMS from every SMS cen- Send Select and press §OK§.
tre that is entered, provided you have reg- SMS Select and press §OK§.
istered with your service provider.
Sending an SMS
Your SMS messages are sent via the
Service Centr. that is entered as the s/C/~
active send service centre. However, Select number with area code
you can select any other SMS centre as the (even if you are in that area)
active send service centre to send a cur- from the directory or call-by-
rent message (page 46). call list, or enter number
directly. For SMS to an SMS
If no SMS Service Centre is entered, mailbox: add the mailbox ID to
the SMS menu only contains the entry the end of the number.
Settings . Enter an SMS Service Centre
(page 46). §Options§ Press the display key.
Send Select and press §OK§. The SMS
will be sent as soon as your
phone's fixed network connec-
tion is free.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

40
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

q Select SMS with the State OK or

Please note:
State not OK status.
– If you are interrupted by an external call
while writing an SMS, the text is automati- §Read§ Press the display key.
cally saved in the draft message list.
Or:
– If the memory is full, or if the SMS function
on the base station is being used by §Delete§ Press the display key. The SMS
another handset, the operation is can- is deleted.
celled. An appropriate message appears in
the display. Delete SMS messages you no
longer require or send the SMS later.
Draft message list
You can save an SMS in the draft message
Using other functions list and edit and send it later.
Precondition: you are writing a text mes- Saving an SMS in the draft message list
sage. ¤ You are writing an SMS (page 40).
§Options§ Open menu. §Options§ Press the display key.
The following functions can be selected Save Select and press §OK§.
with q:
Send Please note:
Send an SMS. After saving, the SMS editor with your SMS will
be displayed again. You can continue writing
Predef. Sound the text and save it again. The SMS that was
Insert ringer tone. saved previously will be overwritten.
Predef. Picture
Insert a picture. Opening the draft message list
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS
¢ (mailbox, mailbox PIN)
Predictive Text
Activate/deactivate predictive text
EATONI, page 112. Outgoing (3)
Select Language Select and press §OK§. The
For EATONI: select the language in number of the SMS messages
which you wish to write the text and in the list will be shown in
press §OK§. brackets (e.g.( 3)).
The first list entry is displayed, e.g.:
SMS status report 1234567890
21.09.05 09:45
Precondition: Your network provider sup-
ports this feature.
Reading or deleting individual SMS
If you have activated the status report, you
will receive an SMS with a confirmation
messages
message after sending. ¤ Open the draft message list and then:
q Select SMS.
Activating/deactivating a status report
Press the display key. The
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
§Read§
entry will be displayed. Scroll
Status Report line by line using q.
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on). Or:
Reading/deleting a status report §Options§ Open menu.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤ Open the incoming message list Delete Entry Press §OK§. The SMS is deleted.
(page 42) and then:

41
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

Writing/editing an SMS the number of the e-mail serv-

¤ You are reading an SMS in the draft ice.
message list. §Send§ Press the display key. The SMS
§Options§ Open menu. will be sent as soon as your
phone's fixed network connec-
You have the following options:
tion is free.
New SMS
Write a new SMS and then send
(page 40) or save it. Receiving an SMS
Edit All received SMS messages are saved in
Edit the text of the saved SMS and then the incoming message list. Linked SMS
send (page 40). messages are displayed as one message. If
Character Set this is too long (it consists of more than 8
Text is shown in the selected character linked individual SMS messages) or if it
set. was not fully transmitted, it will be split
into several individual SMS messages.
Deleting draft message list
¤ Open the draft message list and then: Since an SMS remains in the list even after
it has been read, you should regularly
§Options§ Open menu. delete SMS messages from the list.
Delete all Select, press §OK§ and confirm The display tells you if the SMS memory is
with §Yes§. The list is cleared. full.
a Press and hold (idle status). ¤ Deleting SMS messages you no longer
require (page 43).
Sending SMS messages to an e-mail
address Incoming message list
If your service provider supports the SMS The incoming message list contains:
to e-mail feature, you can also send your u All received SMS messages, starting
SMS messages to e-mail addresses. with the most recent
The e-mail address must be at the begin- u SMS messages that could not be sent
ning of the text. You must send the SMS to due to an error
the e-mail service of your SMS send cen- u SMS status messages, if the status
tre. report is activated (page 41).
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS New SMS messages are signalled on all
¢ (mailbox, mailbox PIN) Gigaset S45 handsets by the À icon in the
¢ New SMS display, the flashing message key f
~ Enter the e-mail address. End and an advisory tone.
the entry with a space or colon
(depending on the service pro- Opening the incoming message list with
vider). the f key
~ Enter the SMS text. f Press.
§Options§ Press the display key. Select mailbox if necessary and enter mail-
box PIN.
Send Select and press §OK§.
E-mail Select and press §OK§ If the
Version 4, 16.09.2005

number of the e-mail service is

not entered (page 46), enter

42
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

The incoming message list is displayed as Deleting incoming message list

follows (example): All new and old SMS messages in the list
SMS: (2) 1 are deleted.
2 ¤ Open the incoming message list.
1 Number of entries in the list. §Options§ Open menu.
2 Name of mailbox, here: general mailbox ¤ To continue, see "Deleting draft mes-
Open list with §OK§. sage list", page 42.
An entry in the list is displayed e.g. as fol-
lows: Replying to or forwarding text
1234567890 1 messages
21.09.05 09:45
2 ¤ Read the SMS (page 43):
1 Number of the sender or name of the direc- §Options§ Press the display key.
tory entry
2 SMS status: You have the following options:
bold: new unread SMS messages Reply
regular: old read SMS messages
Write and send a reply SMS directly
Opening the incoming message list via the (page 40).
SMS menu Edit
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS Edit the text in the SMS and then send
¢ (mailbox, mailbox PIN) it (page 40). Attachments (e.g. pic-
¢ Incoming (2) tures, melodies) are not sent.

Reading or deleting individual SMS Forwarding an SMS

messages ¤ You are reading an SMS (page 43):
¤ Open the incoming message list. §Options§ Press the display key.
¤ Continue as described at "Reading or Forward Select and press §OK§. For fur-
deleting individual SMS messages", ther information, see page 40.
page 41.
Attachments are forwarded. If a service
A new SMS which you have read receives provider does not permit the forwarding
the status Old. of attachments:
Changing the character set ¤ Select Edit to forward the SMS without
¤ Read the SMS (page 43): attachments.

If you cannot see any text or symbols, the

¤ Confirm the prompt New SMS will not
contain picture/ melody. Continue? with
SMS may have been written with a differ- §Yes§.
ent character set.
§Options§ Press the display key.
Character Set
Select and press §OK§.
q Select character set and press
§OK§.
Text is shown in the selected character set.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

43
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

Accept number in the directory Notification by SMS

Adding the sender's number You can arrange to be notified about
¤ Open incoming message list and select missed calls by SMS.
entry (page 42). Precondition: For missed calls, the caller's
§Options§ Press the display key. For fur- number (CLI) must have been transmit-
ther information, see page 36. ted.
Please note: Notification is sent to your mobile phone
– You can create a special directory for SMS or another phone with SMS functionality.
messages within your main directory by You only need to set the phone number to
putting a star (*) before the names.
which notification should be sent (notifi-
– An attached mail box identifier is added to
the directory. They must be deleted for 'nor-
cation number) and the notification type.
mal calls'.
Please note that your network provider will
usually charge for SMS notifications.
Dialling numbers from SMS texts/
transferring to the directory Storing the notification number
¤ Read SMS (page 43) and scroll to the v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
telephone number. ¢ Notify Number
The digits are reverse-highlighted. ~ Enter the number (including
c Press the talk key to dial the dialling code) to which the
number. SMS is to be sent.
Or: §Save§ Press the display key.
Ó Press the display key to trans- a Press and hold (idle status).
fer the number to the direc-
tory. Warning:
Do not enter your own fixed network number
The directory is opened. for the notification of missed calls. This can
New Entry Press §OK§ to confirm. lead to chargeable endless looping.
The highlighted number will be trans-
ferred into the Number : field. For further
Setting the notification type
information, see page 34. v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
¢ Notify Type
Please note: Missed Calls:
– The + symbol is not transferred for interna- Set On if you require SMS notification.
tional dialling codes.
¥You should then enter '00' at the start of
¤ Save changes (page 112).
the number.
– If an SMS contains several numbers, the
next number will be highlighted if you
scroll down until the first number disap-
pears from the display.

If you wish to use the number to send an

SMS:
¤ Save the number with the area code
Version 4, 16.09.2005

(dialling code) in the directory.

44
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

SMS mailboxes Active mailboxes are marked with ½ in the

mailbox list. They are shown in the SMS
The General Mailbox is the default set- list and can, if necessary, be displayed by
ting. Anyone can access this mailbox and pressing the message key f.
it cannot be protected by a PIN. You can
additionally set up three personal mail-
Deactivating a mailbox
boxes and protect these with a PIN. Each ¤ Set On/Off: to Off. Confirm message with
mailbox is identified by a name and a §Yes§ if necessary.
'Mailbox ID' (a kind of extension number). §Save§ Press the display key.
All SMS messages saved in this mailbox
Please note:
will be deleted.
u If you operate a number of devices
(base stations) with SMS functionality Deactivating PIN protection
on a single phone line, then each SMS ¤ Set Protection: to Off.
mailbox ID may only occur once. In this
case you must also change the preset The mailbox PIN is reset to '0000'.
ID of the general mailbox ('0'). Changing the name of a mailbox
u You can only use personal mailboxes if v ¢ îMessaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
your service provider supports this
function. You can tell whether this is
¢ SMS Mailboxes ¢ sSS
(Select mailbox)
the case by the addition of a star (*) to
the number of a (preset) SMS centre. §Edit§ Press the display key.
u If you have forgotten your mailbox PIN, ~ Enter new name.
you can reset it by restoring the base §Save§ Press the display key.
station's default settings. This will a Press and hold (idle status).
delete all SMS messages from all
mailboxes. Changing a mailbox's PIN and ID
v ¢ îMessaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
Setting up and changing a personal ¢ SMS Mailboxes ¢ sSS
mailbox (Select mailbox)
~ Enter mailbox PIN if required
Setting up a personal mailbox und press §OK§.
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings ¤ Set ID:, Protection: and PIN (page 45).
¢ SMS Mailboxes
s Select a mailbox, Sending an SMS to a personal mailbox
e.g. Mailbox 2, and press §OK§.
¤ Change multiple line input: To send an SMS to a personal mailbox, the
sender must know your ID and enter it
On/Off: after your number.
Activate or deactivate mailbox.
¤ You can send your SMS contact an SMS
ID: via your personal mailbox.
Select mailbox ID (0–9). You can only
Your SMS contact will receive your SMS
select the available numbers.
number with current ID and can save it in
Protection: their directory. If the ID is invalid, the SMS
Activate/deactivate PIN protection. will not be delivered.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

PIN
If necessary, enter 4-digit PIN.
¤ Save changes (page 112).
45
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

Setting SMS centre SMS info services

You can have your service provider send
Entering/changing SMS centres you certain information (e.g. weather
¤ You should find out about the services forecasts or lottery numbers) via SMS. A
total of up to 10 info services can be
and special functions offered by your
service provider before you make a stored. You can obtain information about
new application and/or before you the info services available and their costs
delete pre-configured call numbers. from your service provider.
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings Setting up/ordering an info service
¢ Service Centres
s
Ordering an info service
Select SMS centre (e.g. Service
Centr. 1) and press §OK§. v ¢ î Messaging ¢ SMS
¤ Change multiple line input: ¢ SMS Service
Active Send: s Select info service.
Select Yes if the text messages are to be §Send Press the display key.
sent via the SMS centre. For the SMS
centres 2 to 4, the setting only applies Setting up an info service
to the next SMS. ¤ Select an empty entry for an info serv-
ice (see above). Then:
SMS:
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the §Edit§ Press the display key.
number of the SMS service and insert a ~ Enter the code, name and des-
star if your service provider supports tination number as appropri-
personal mailboxes. ate.
E-mail: §Save§ Press the display key.
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the
number of the e-mail service. Editing the entry of an info service
¤ Save changes (page 112). ¤ Select the info service (see above).
Then:
Please note:
Ask your service provider for details on how to Options§ Open menu.
enter service numbers if you wish to use per- Edit Entry Select and press §OK§.
~
sonal mailboxes (precondition: your service
provider supports this function). If necessary, change the code,
designation or destination
number.
Sending an SMS through another SMS
§Save§ Press the display key.
centre
¤ Activate the SMS centre (2 to 4) as Deleting an info service
active send service centre. ¤ Select the info service (see above).
¤ Send the SMS. Then:
This setting only applies to the next SMS Options§ Open menu.
to be sent. Thereafter, the setting returns Delete Entry
to Service Centr. 1. Select and press §OK§.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

46
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

SMS on a PABX Activating/deactivating

u You can only receive an SMS when the SMS function
Calling Line Identification is for-
warded to the extension of the PABX If you deactivate the SMS function, you
(CLIP). The CLIP of the phone number cannot send or receive SMS messages
for the SMS centre is evaluated in your with your phone.
Gigaset. The settings which you have made for
u If required, you must prefix the number sending and receiving SMS messages (e.g.
for the SMS centre with the access code the call numbers of the SMS centres) and
(depending on your PABX). the entries in the incoming and draft mes-
sage lists are saved even after you switch
If in doubt, test your PABX, e.g. by
off your phone.
sending an SMS to your own number:
once with and once without the access v Open menu.
code. 55O2L
u When you send SMS messages, your Enter the digits.
sender number may be sent without Q §OK§ Deactivate SMS function.
your extension number. In this case the
Or:
recipient cannot reply to you directly.
1 §OK§ Activate SMS function (default
Sending and receiving SMS on ISDN
settings).
PABXs is only possible via the MSN
number assigned to your base station.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

47
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / sms_BRD_neutral.fm / 28.3.07

SMS (text messages)

SMS troubleshooting The message is played back.

1. The 'display call number' service is not acti-
Error codes when sending vated.
E0 Calling Line Identification permanently ¥ Ask your service provider to activate this
withheld (CLIR) or Calling Line function (chargeable).
Identification not activated. 2. Mobile phone operator and fixed network
FE Error occurred during SMS transfer. SMS service provider have not agreed on a
cooperation.
FD Connection to SMS centre failed, see self- ¥ Obtain information from your fixed net-
help. work SMS service provider.
3. Your terminal is recorded by your SMS pro-
Self-help with errors vider as having no fixed network SMS func-
The following table lists error situations tionality, i.e. you are no longer registered
and possible causes and provides notes on with the provider.
troubleshooting. ¥ Obtain information from your fixed net-
work SMS service provider.
You cannot send messages. ¥ Have the device (re-)registered to
receive SMS messages.
1. You have not requested the CLIP service
(Calling Line Identification Presentation). Messages are only received during the day.
¥Ask your service provider to enable this 1. The terminal is recorded in your SMS pro-
service. vider's database as having no fixed network
2. SMS transfer was interrupted (e.g. by an SMS functionality, i.e. you are no longer
registered with the provider.
incoming call).
¥Re-send the SMS. ¥ Obtain information from your fixed net-
work SMS service provider.
3. Network provider does not support this ¥ Have the device (re-)registered to
feature. receive SMS messages (see above).
4. No number or an invalid number is entered
for the SMS centre set as the active send
service centre.
¥ Enter the number (page 46).
You receive an incomplete SMS.
1. Your phone's memory is full.
¥Delete old SMS messages (page 43).
2. The provider has not yet sent the rest of the
message.
You have stopped receiving SMS messages.
1. You have changed the ID of your mailbox.
¥Give your SMS contacts your new ID or
undo the change (page 45).
2. You have not activated your mailbox.
¥Activate your mailbox (page 45).
3. Call forwarding is activated with When: All
Calls or the call forwarding All Calls is acti-
vated for the network mailbox.
¥ Change the call forwarding.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

48
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / email.fm / 28.3.07

E-mail notifications

E-mail notifications Entering access data for the

incoming e-mail server
Your phone will notify you when new e-
mail messages have been received on For the handset to check for new e-mails,
your incoming e-mail server. you must save the address of your Internet
It periodically connects to the e-mail service provider's incoming e-mail server
server (around every 15 minutes) and and the username and password for
checks for any new messages. access to your mailbox on the phone. Your
Internet provider will supply you with this
Any new messages that have been
information.
received are displayed on all Gigaset S45
handsets that have been registered: you Please note:
will hear an advisory tone, the message
key f will flash and symbol À will be
For how to make the setting using the Web
configurator, see page 98.
displayed in the idle display.
Entering the incoming e-mail server
Please note: v ¢ î Messaging ¢ E-mail ¢ Settings
The symbol À is also displayed if new SMS
¢ Incoming (POP3)
¤ Enter the name of the incoming e-mail
messages or messenger messages have been
received.
If new e-mail messages have been received, server (POP3 server) (max. 74 charac-
pressing the message key f will display ters). Example: pop.theserver.com.
them in list E-mail: .
¤ Select §Options§ ¢ Save and press §OK§.
You can use your phone to connect to the Entering access data
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ E-mail ¢ Settings
incoming e-mail server and display the
¢ Registration
sender, date and time of receipt and sub-
ject for every e-mail message in the list of
incoming mail (page 50). ¤ Change multiple line input:
Username:
Preconditions: Enter the user name (account name)
u You have set up an e-mail account with agreed with the Internet provider
an Internet provider. (max. 32 characters).
u The incoming e-mail server uses the Authent. Password:
POP3 protocol. Enter the password that you agreed
u You have stored the name of the with your provider for accessing the
incoming e-mail server and your per- incoming e-mail server (max. 32 char-
sonal access data (account name, pass- acters; case sensitive).
word) in the phone (page 49). ¤ Press the display key §Save§ to save
entries.
The characters will be displayed as entered
when you enter your password, as long as
the cursor is on this line. Thereafter, the
password will be replaced by a row of
asterisks for security reasons.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

49
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / email.fm / 28.3.07

E-mail notifications

Opening the incoming Please note:

e-mail server Many e-mail providers operate standard spam
protection measures. E-mail messages classi-
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ E-mail ¢ Inbox
fied as spam are stored in a separate folder and
are therefore not shown on the list of incom-
Or if new e-mail messages have been ing mail.
received (the message key f is flash- Some e-mail providers allow you to deactivate
spam protection or show spam e-mails on the
ing):
list of incoming mail.
f ¢ E-mail: Other e-mail providers may send a message to
The phone will connect to the incoming e- the Inbox when a new spam e-mail is received.
This is to inform you that a suspected spam e-
mail server. A list of e-mail messages that mail has been received.
are stored there will be displayed. Date and sender of this mail are repeatedly
New unread messages appear above old updated, so that it is always displayed as a new
read messages. The most recent entry is at message.
the head of the list.
Messages when establishing a connection
The name or e-mail address of the sender
(one line, abbreviated if necessary) is The following problems may occur when
shown along with the date and time for connecting to the incoming e-mail server.
every e-mail (the date and time only have The messages are displayed in the hand-
correct values if the sender and recipient set's display for a few seconds.
are located in the same time zone). Server not accessible!
Example display: The connection to the incoming e-mail
server could not be established. This
Inbox may have the following causes:
Susi Sorglos 1 – Incorrect entry for name of incom-
29.11.06 12:20 2 ing e-mail server
Louise Miller – Temporary problems with the
29.11.06 11:15 incoming e-mail server (server is
down or is not connected to the
Internet).
¤ Check settings (page 49).
From Subject

1 E-mail address or name transmitted by the ¤ Try again later.

sender
Bold: New message.
Currently not possible!
2 Date and time of receipt of e-mail message The resources your phone requires to
make the connection are busy, e.g.:
If the incoming message list on the incom-
– Two VoIP connections have already
ing e-mailserver is empty, No entries will be
been made
displayed.
– Another handset is currently con-
nected to the incoming e-mail
server.
¤ Try again later.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

50
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / email.fm / 28.3.07

E-mail notifications

Log-in failed! View e-mail sender's address

Error during login to incoming e-mail
server. This may have the following Precondition: You have opened the
cause: incoming mail list (page 50).
– Incorrect entries for name of incom- q Select e-mail entry.
ing e-mail server, user name and/or §From§ Press the display key.
password. The sender's e-mail address is shown in
¤ Check settings (page 49). full.
Mailbox settings incomplete! ” Press the display key to return
Incorrect entries for name of incoming to the incoming message list.
e-mail server, user name and/or pass-
Example:
word.
¤ Check settings and complete if nec- From
essary (page 49).
Susi.Sorglos@mailp
rov.com
View the message header of an e-mail
Precondition: You have opened the
incoming mail list (page 50).
Ý
q
Options
Select e-mail entry.
§Subject§ Press the display key.
The subject of the e-mail message will be
displayed (max. 120 characters).
” Press the display key to return
to the incoming message list.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

51
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Messenger u Exchange messages with your buddies.

Your handset notifies you about new
messages with a flashing message key
The messenger in your handset enables f and a beep.
instant messaging (immediate message
u Call your buddies directly from your
transfer, chatting). The phone supports
buddy list (page 58).
the XMPP messenger (Jabber).
Instant messaging refers to communica- Requirements for instant messaging:
tion between 'friends' on the Internet. u You have registered with an instant
Subscribers exchange short messages messaging provider via the Web
which are forwarded immediately. This browser on your PC and (optionally)
gives rise to a flowing 'conversation' simi- agreed a Web name (nickname).
lar to chatting. u You have created a buddy list via the
The precondition for this form of commu- messenger client on the PC.
nication is that both subscribers have a u You have saved the messenger server
connection to the messenger server of address and your access data for the
the same instant messaging provider. messenger server (user ID, password)
Therefore, both subscribers must be in the phone using the Web configura-
'online'. The messenger server forwards tor (page 97). The phone needs the
the messages to the recipient. data to establish a connection with the
The subscribers to instant messaging are messenger server.
called buddies.
Most messenger servers allow you to cre- Please note:
If your instant messaging provider doesn't sup-
ate what are known as buddy lists. You port the phone's messenger client, then you
can store the buddies you want to chat to can open an account with an open Jabber
in the buddy list. server and use the Web configurator to enter
The messenger server informs you as soon its address in your phone. Many of these Jab-
ber servers offer gateways to other messenger
as one of your buddies comes online or servers (e.g. AOL, ICQ, MSN, Yahoo!).
goes offline. Offline means that the You can find a list of Jabber servers and an
buddy has disconnected from the messen- overview of the gateways to other messenger
ger server. servers on the Internet at
In addition to this, each buddy can deter- http://www.jabber.org.
mine their own (communication) status You can find information on setting up a Jab-
ber account with connections from ICQ, MSN
(state of presence, see page 54), from or Yahoo on the Internet, e.g. at :
which buddies can tell whether they are in http://web.swissjabber.ch
the mood to chat or wish to remain undis-
turbed.
The Web configurator on your phone gives
you the following options:
u Go online (page 53).
u Display the list of your contacts (bud-
dies) on the handset that you previ-
ously created on the PC. This will indi-
cate for each buddy whether they are
available (online) and ready to chat
Version 4, 16.09.2005

(state of presence, see page 54).

52
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Establishing a connection, You remain online until you set your status
to Offline (page 54) or the connection to
going online the messenger server is terminated
(page 58).
When you go online, your buddy list will
You also remain online if you press the end
call key a.
be displayed on the handset and you will
receive messages from your buddies.
Only one of the handsets connected to the If the connection cannot be established,
base station can connect to the messen- you will receive an appropriate message.
ger server. You can then only 'chat' on this Please try again later (page 58).
handset.
Please note:
An external call will interrupt the 'chat', You can also assign the messenger to one of
but you will still be online. You can con- the display keys on your handset (page 60).
tinue your chat after you end or reject the The connection is established when you press
call. the display key.

Precondition: You have saved the mes-

senger server address and your access Lost connection
data for the messenger server (user ID and If your phone loses its connection to the
password) in the phone using the Web messenger server, the display key f
configurator (page 97). will flash on the handset that had been
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ Messenger connected to the messenger. In idle status
§Yes§ Press the display key to con- it will display "Messenger connection failed!".
firm the prompt. All messages that you previously had
received, as well as any message you were
The phone attempts to establish a connec- currently writing, will be saved.
tion. You are informed about the status of
the connection by messages on the dis- Reconnecting:
play. f Press the message key.
If the connection can be established, you §Yes§ Press the display key to con-
are Online . The display will show the sub- firm the prompt.
menu for your messenger. You can open The phone will attempt to reconnect. You
your buddy list, send and receive mes- are informed about the status of the con-
sages and call your buddies. nection by messages on the display.
The following is displayed when the hand- If you reply to the request with §No§ the
set is in idle status: phone will behave as during regular dis-
Ð V connection. All messenger messages will
be deleted. The phone is offline.
INT 1
%

19.09.06 12:00
FixedLine IP
Version 4, 16.09.2005

53
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Changing/checking your Changing status

personal status, going offline v ¢ î Messaging ¢ Messenger
¢ User Status ¢ Change Status
You want to log off (go offline) or let your s Select status and press §OK§
buddies know whether you wish to chat or (½ = on).
a
would prefer to remain undisturbed.
Press and hold if necessary
You have the following options: (idle status).
Offline
You log off from the messenger server. Disconnect, go offline
The messenger server informs your
buddies that you are no longer avail- ¤ Select Offline status, and respond
able. §Yes§.to the security prompt.

The handset switches to idle status. The connection to the messenger server
You can neither send nor receive mes- will be terminated. The handset returns to
sages. idle status. New messenger messages are
no longer sent to you. The messenger
Online
message list is deleted. The buddy list is no
(Setting after successful connection)
longer available.
You are logged on to the messenger
server and can send and receive mes- Please note:
sages. Whether messages directed to you are deleted
Ready for chat or stored in the messenger server depends on
the provider. Stored messages are sent to you
You are Online and can send and when you go online again.
receive messages.
You invite your buddies to 'chat' with Checking your status and user ID
you.
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ Messenger
¢ User Status ¢ Info
Away / Extended Away / Do not disturb
You are Online and can send and
receive messages. You inform your If you are online, the following informa-
buddies that you currently cannot/do tion may be displayed (depending on your
not wish to 'chat', i.e. will not reply to provider):
their messages immediately. u Your Web name (nickname, abbrevi-
Invisible ated if necessary)
You are Online and can send and u Your current status
receive messages. u Your user ID (format: userid@provider-
However, the messenger server indi- domain; abbreviated if necessary)
cates to your buddies that you are Only Offline will be displayed if you are
Offline . offline.
Please note:
All status settings apart from Offline only
inform other buddies about your communica-
tion status. Whether this information is passed
on to your buddies depends on the provider.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

54
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Opening the buddy list The buddies appear on the list in the fol-
lowing order. You can interpret their sta-
Precondition: you are Online and have tus by means of the colour of the % icon
already created a buddy list (using the PC) next to the buddies (page 54):
on your provider's messenger server. 1. Buddies with Online status or Ready for
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ Messenger chat in alphabetical order. The % icon is
¢ Buddies green.
2. Buddies with Away , Extended Away or
Only the first 20 (maximum) buddies on Do not disturb status in alphabetical or-
the buddy list will be read by the messen- der. The % icon is orange.
ger server and displayed on the handset.
3. Buddies with Offline or Invisible status in
alphabetical order. The % icon is red.
The number depends on the available
memory space.
The buddies that are displayed depend on Please note:
which buddies were transferred from the The buddy list will remain open until you exit it
messenger server first. (press and release or press and hold a).
The handset will not automatically return to
idle status.
Please note:
You can also receive and respond to messages
from buddies who are not on the list displayed
Changes in the status of buddies
on the handset. You have opened the buddy list and one of
the buddies changes their status. The fol-
Example: lowing distinctions are made:
u A buddy changes to status Online /
Buddies
Ready for chat :
%
%
Mark You are informed via a message on the
&
Julian
display. The buddy list is updated.
&
Lisa
Herbert u In the event of another status change,
the buddy list is updated. No message
Chat Info
is displayed.
The Web names (nicknames) of your bud-
Please note:
dies are displayed on the list. If they do not If the buddy changes to Offline status, your
have a Web name, the user ID is displayed. messages are no longer sent to them. Whether
If the name of a buddy is longer than one the messenger server stores the messages
line, it will be abbreviated. You can navi- until the buddy is Online again or deletes them
gate the list with the control key q.
depends on the provider.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

55
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Requesting information about buddies Please note:

You have opened the buddy list (page 55). The list messenger is only displayed if you are
online.
q Select buddy..
§Info§ Press the display key. Opening the message list using the
f key
The display depends on the provider.
The message key flashes.
Example:
¤ Press the message key f.
Info ¤ Select list Messenger: (2) if required and
press §OK§. The number in brackets indi-
Julian 1
Online 2 cates the number of new messages.
Julian.Reeves@jabbe 3
r.com Please note:
Ý
If you are in the messenger menu or one of its
Chat submenus/text editors and you press the flash-
ing message key f, this will open the mes-
1 Web name (nickname, abbreviated if neces- senger list directly.
sary)
2 Status
3 User ID (format: userid@provider-domain; To open the message list from the menu:
abbreviated if necessary). (Resource names In the handset idle status:
v ¢ î Messaging ¢ Messenger
are not displayed.)
If the buddy changes their status the entry
is updated. ¢ Messages
Select and press §OK§.
Press ” to return to your buddy list. Press
§Chat§ if you want to 'chat' with the buddy. Message list
The messages on the list are sorted chron-
Chatting to buddies ologically, with the oldest message at the
head of the list.
You want to 'chat' to a buddy, i.e. send a
message. Example of a list display:
Precondition: you have opened the Messenger
buddy list (page 55) and selected a buddy
with q. Julian 1
¤ Press the display key §Chat§. The text edi- 20.10.06 15:25 2

tor is opened. INFO message 3

¤ Write and send your message 20.10.06
Delete
15:30
Read
(page 57).
The buddy list is shown again. 1 Sender's Web name/user ID
Bold: new/unread message
2 Date and time of message
Receiving messages 3 Message from the messenger server
(page 57)
Precondition: you are online. If the memory is full and new messages
Newly arrived buddy or info messages arrive, the oldest message(s) will be over-
(page 57) are indicated by a flashing mes- written. If there are not old (read) mes-
sage key f and a beep, even if you are sages, the oldest (unread) messages will
Version 4, 16.09.2005

in a messenger menu or text editor. be overwritten.

The messages are stored in the Messenger:
message list.

56
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Message types Writing and sending messages

In instant messaging, a distinction is made
Precondition:
between the following types of message:
u You are reading a buddy's message and
u Buddy messages are the 'instant mes-
press the display key §Answer§ or
sages' you receive from your buddies.
You can answer the messages. u You have pressed the display key §Chat§
u Info messages are special information
in the buddy list or the buddy profiles.
from the provider. They are forwarded A text editor is opened.
to you, but you cannot reply to them. ¤ Use the handset keys to enter a mes-
Example: With some messaging pro- sage (max. 612 characters, EATONI pre-
viders you receive an info message dictive text is available, page 112).
when another subscriber tries to add ¤ Select §Menu§ ¢ Send and press §OK§.
you to their buddy list. You are
prompted to check the messages on The message is sent to the buddy.
the messenger client on your PC. If the messenger server is unable to send
Via the messenger client on your PC the message to the buddy, a message will
you can agree to the action or refuse be displayed.
permission. Without your agreement, ¤ Confirm the message by clicking on
the other subscriber cannot add you to §OK§.
their buddy list.
The text-editor will re-open with your
Reading messages message. You can then retry sending the
message.
Precondition: You have opened the mes-
sage list and selected a message with s. Interruption while writing
¤ Press the display key §Read§. If you receive a call while you are writing a
The message is opened for you to read. message or the connection to the messen-
You have the following options: ger server is interrupted, the text editor is
terminated. Your message is stored tem-
§Delete§ Delete a message from the list porarily until ...
You will return to the message
list. u ... you start up a chat with the same
buddy (page 56). The text editor is
Or: opened with the stored text. You can
§Answer§ (for buddy messages only) finish writing the message and send it.
Reply to message. The text u ... you wish to write a message to
editor is opened. You can write another buddy. The stored text is
a reply (see "Writing and send- deleted. The text editor is empty.
ing messages" on page 57). u ... you go offline. The text is deleted.
Or:
a Back to the message list. Menu options for the text editor
By pressing §Menu§ within the text editor
Deleting a message you have the following options:
Precondition: You have opened the mes- Send
sage list and selected a message with s. Send message to buddy.
¤ Press the display key §Delete§. Delete Text
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Delete the whole text.

57
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / messenger.fm / 28.3.07

Messenger

Predictive Text Self-help with errors

Activate/deactivate predictive text, see
page 112. While establishing a connection to the
Select Language messenger server, during connection and
For predictive text: select the language when sending messages the following
in which you wish to write the text and errors may occur.
press §OK§.
Behaviour when the connection is lost
Calling a buddy If the connection to the messenger server
is interrupted, an appropriate message is
You can call a buddy directly.
shown in the display. You are Offline .
Precondition: the messenger server sup-
If you are in a submenu of the messenger,
ports calls using vCard and your buddy's
the handset switches to the messenger
vCard contains a phone number.
menu.
Preconditions: ¤ Try to re-establish the connection
u You have opened the buddy list and (page 53).
selected a buddy
or Errors when sending
u You have opened the buddy's profile
If it is not possible to send a message, a
or distinction is made between the following
u You have opened the Messenger: list situations:
and selected a buddy u The connection to the messenger
or server is interrupted:
u You are reading a message from a A message is shown in the display to
buddy indicate that the connection to the
c / d Press and release/hold the messenger server has been inter-
talk or handsfree key. rupted.
The phone will try to establish a VoIP/fixed The message is stored temporarily
network connection. (page 57).
The first number that is found on the ¤ Try to re-establish the connection
vCard will be dialled. (page 53) and send the message
again.
Ending a call u The server is unable to send the mes-
a Press the end call key. sage:
A message is shown in the display to
indicate that the message could not be
sent. If, for example, the buddy is not
available, the message you have sent
will also be displayed.
The message is stored temporarily
(page 57).
¤ If necessary, check the buddy's user
ID and send the message again later.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

58
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Setting the handset

Setting the handset Setting the screen picture

You can display a screen picture (picture or
Your handset is preconfigured, but you
digital clock) when the handset is in idle
can change these settings to suit your
status. This will replace the idle status dis-
individual requirements.
play. It may conceal the date, time and
name.
Changing the display language The screen picture is not displayed in cer-
tain situations, e.g. during a call or when
You can view the display texts in different the handset has been de-registered.
languages.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Handset
If a logo has been activated, the menu
item Screen Picture is marked with ½.
¢ Language
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Display
The current language is marked with ½. ¢ Screen Picture
s Select a language and press The current setting is displayed.
§OK§.
¤ Change multiple line input:
a Press and hold (idle status).
Activation:
If you accidentally choose a language you Select On (screen picture is displayed)
do not understand: or Off (no screen picture).
v 5 41 Selection:
Press keys in sequence. Change screen picture if necessary
s Select the correct language (see below).
and press §OK§. ¤ Save changes (page 112).
If the screen picture conceals the display,
Setting the display press the end call key briefly to show the
idle display with time and date.
You have a choice of four colour schemes
and several different contrasts. Changing the screen picture
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Display v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Display
Colour Scheme ¢ Screen Picture
Select and press §OK§. s Scroll to the Selection line.
s Select a colour scheme and §View§ Press the display key. The
press §OK§ (½ = current colour). active screen picture is dis-
a Press briefly. played
s Scroll to the Contrast line. s Select a picture or Clock .
Contrast Select and press §OK§. §Save§ Press the display key.
r Select contrast. ¤ Save changes (page 112).
§Save§ Press the display key.
a Press and hold (idle status).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

59
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Setting the handset

Setting the display backlight u SMS Service (§SMS Info§)

Opens the menu for ordering an info
Depending on whether or not the handset service (page 46):
is in the base station you can set different î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ SMS Service
levels of display backlight. If the base sta- u SMS Notific. (§Notif.§)
tion is switched on, the display is perma-
nently dimmed. Opens the menu for activating SMS
notification (page 44):
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Display ¢ Backlight
î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings
The current setting is displayed. ¢ Notify Type
¤ Change multiple line input: u E-mail (§EMail§)
In Charger Opens the e-mail submenu for receiv-
Select On or Off. ing and reading e-mail notifications
without Charger (page 49):
Select On or Off. î Messaging ¢ E-mail
§Save§ Press the display key. u Messenger (§Messgr.§)
a Press and hold (idle status). Opens the Messenger submenu for
chatting with friends on the Internet
Please note: (page 52):
When the display backlight is switched on, the î Messaging ¢ Messenger
standby time of the handset is reduced to
approx. 30 hours. u Fixed Line Call (§FixedLine§)
Opens the pre-dialling option for mak-
ing a call via the fixed network (fixed
Assigning the handset's line).
display keys u IP Call (§IP§)
Opens the pre-dialling option for mak-
The default settings for the handset's dis- ing a call via VoIP.
q
play keys are preset with functions in idle
Select a function and press
status. You can change the assignment of
§OK§.
the display keys, i.e. assign other func-
tions to the display keys. The change is The handset returns to idle status.
handset-specific. The label of the display key has changed
(e.g. §Messgr.§ when choosing: Messenger ).
Assigning a function
Starting a function
¤ In idle status press and hold the right
or left display key (e.g. §FixedLine§). ¤ With the handset in idle status, press
the display key briefly.
The list of possible key assignments is
opened. The following can be selected: The function menu (page 60) is opened.
u INT (§INT§)
Opens the list of internal subscribers.
u SMS (§SMS§)
Opens the SMS submenu for writing,
sending and reading SMS messages
(page 40):
Version 4, 16.09.2005

î Messaging ¢ SMS

60
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Setting the handset

Activating/deactivating Changing ringer tones

auto answer u Volume:
You can choose between five volumes
(1–5; e.g. volume 2 = ˆ) and
If you have activated this function, when
you get a call you can simply lift the hand-
the "Crescendo" ring (6; volume
set out of the base station without having
to press the talk key c.
increases with each ring =
‰).
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Handset
u Ringer tones:
Auto Answer You can choose between 15 different
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on). melodies.
a Press and hold (idle status). You can set different ringer tones for the
following functions:
Adjusting the loudspeaker u Ext. Calls: for external calls
volume u Internal Calls: for internal calls
u All: the same ringer tone for all func-
You can set the loudspeaker volume for tions
handsfree talking to five different levels
and the earpiece volume to three different Settings for individual functions
levels. You can only make these adjust-
ments during a call. Set the volume and melody depending on
the type of signalling required.
The handsfree volume can only be
adjusted when this function is set. v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Audio Settings
You are conducting an external call.
¢ Ringer Settings
t
Ext. Calls / Internal Calls
Open menu.
Select and press §OK§.
r Select volume. ¤ Change multiple line input:
§Save§ Press display key if necessary r Set volume (1–6).
to save the setting perma-
nently. s Scroll to the next line.
If t is assigned with another function, r Select melody.
e.g. when toggling (page 31): §Save§ Press the display key to save
§Options§ Open menu. the setting.
Volume Select and press §OK§. In idle status, you can also open the menu
Ringer Settings by pressing t briefly.
Configure setting (see above).
Same ringer tone for all functions
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Audio Settings
¢ Ringer Settings ¢ All
¤ Set volume and ringer tone (see
"Settings for individual functions").
§Yes§ Press the display key to con-
firm the prompt.
a
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Press and hold (idle status).

61
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Setting the handset

Activating/deactivating the ringer tone Activating/deactivating advisory

You can deactivate the ringer tone on your tones
handset before you answer a call or when
the handset is in idle status; the ringer Your handset uses "advisory tones" to tell
tone can be deactivated permanently or you about different activities and statuses.
just for the current call. The ringer tone The following advisory tones can be acti-
cannot be re-activated while an external vated and deactivated independently of
call is in progress. each other:
u Key click: every key press is confirmed.
Deactivating the ringer tone permanently
u Advisory tones:
* Press and hold the star key
until the Ú icon appears in the
– Confirmation tone (ascending tone
sequence): at the end of an entry/
display.
setting and when an SMS or a new
Re-activating the ringer tone entry arrives in the calls list
* Press and hold the star key. – Error tone (descending tone
sequence): when you make an
Deactivating the ringer tone for the current incorrect entry
call – Menu end tone: when scrolling at
§Silence§ Press the display key. the end of a menu
u Battery tone: The batteries need to be
Activating/deactivating the alert tone charged.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Audio Settings
In place of the ringer tone you can activate
an alert tone. When you receive a call, you ¢ Advisory Tones
will hear a short tone ("Beep") instead of ¤ Change multiple line input:
the ringer tone. Key Tones:
* Press and hold the star key Select On or Off.
and within 3 seconds: Confirm.:
§Beep§§ Press the display key. A call will Select On or Off.
now be signalled by one short Battery:
alert tone. You will now see Select On, Off or In Call. The battery
º in the display. warning tone is only activated/deacti-
vated and only sounds during a call.
Activating/deactivating muting ¤ Save changes (page 112).
You cannot deactivate the confirmation
of the first ring tone for placing the handset in the base
v Open menu. station.
55O1O
Press keys.
Q §OK§ Make the first ringer tone
audible.
Or:
1 §OK§ Suppress the first ringer tone.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

a Press and hold (idle status).

62
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Setting the handset

Setting the alarm clock Restoring the handset default

Precondition: The date and time have settings
already been set (page 9).
Each individual handset setting is reset, in
particular the language, display, volume,
Activating/deactivating the alarm ringer and alarm clock settings (see from
clock and setting the wake-up time page 59). The last number redial list is
v ¢ ì Alarm Clock cleared.
¤ Change multiple line input: v ¢ Ð ¢ Handset ¢ Reset Handset
Activation: §Yes§ Press the display key.
Select On or Off. You can cancel the restoring
process by pressing a or the
Time:
display key §No§.
Enter the wake-up time in 4-digit for-
mat. a Press and hold (idle status).
Melody:
Select melody.
Volume:
Set the volume (1-6).
¤ Save changes (page 112).
You will see the ¼ icon.
A wake-up call with the selected ringer
melody is signalled on the handset.
The wake up call sounds for 60 seconds.
The display shows Alarm Clock . If no key is
pressed, the wake-up call is repeated
twice at five minute intervals and then
switched off.
During a call, the wake-up call is signalled
by a short tone.

Deactivating the wake-up call/

repeating after a pause (snooze mode)
Precondition: A wake-up call is sounding.
§OFF§ Press the display key. The
wake-up call is deactivated.
or
§Snooze§ Press the display key or any
key. The wake-up call is deacti-
vated and then repeated after
5 minutes. After the second
repetition the wake-up call is
deactivated completely.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

63
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Base station settings

Base station settings Restoring the base station to

factory settings
The base station settings are carried out
using a registered Gigaset S45 handset.
Resetting the base station via the
Protecting against unauthorised menu
Each individual setting is reset, in particu-
access lar:
Protect the system settings of the base sta- u VoIP settings such as VoIP provider and
tion with a PIN known only to yourself. account data and DTMF settings
The system PIN is one of the items you (page 67, page 83, page 93)
must enter when registering and deregis- u Settings for the local network (page 68,
tering a handset, changing the VoIP set- page 82)
tings or restoring to factory settings. u Default connection (page 65)
u The names of the handsets (page 74)
Changing the system PIN u SMS settings (e.g. SMS centres,
You will have to enter the system PIN e.g. page 40)
when you register a handset with the base u Settings for the connection to the PABX
station, change the VoIP settings or start (page 70)
the Web configurator. SMS lists and calls list are deleted.
You can change the base station's 4-digit The date and time and the system PIN are
default system PIN ("0000") to a 4-digit retained. The handsets are still registered.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base ¢ Base Reset
system PIN known only to yourself.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base ¢ System PIN
~ Enter the system PIN and press
~ Enter current system PIN and §OK§.
press §OK§.
Press the display key to
~
§Yes§
Enter new system PIN. confirm.
s Scroll to the Re-enter PIN: line.
~ Now re-enter the new system
PIN and press §OK§.
For security reasons, "****" is displayed
instead of the system PIN.
a Press and hold (idle status).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

64
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Base station settings

Resetting the base station using a key Activating/deactivating

on the base station
repeater mode
As with resetting the base station via the
menu, all individual settings are reset. The With a repeater you can increase the range
system PIN will also be reset to "0000" and and reception strength of your base sta-
all handsets registered above and tion. You will need to activate repeater
beyond the delivery scope are deregis- mode. This will terminate any calls being
tered. made via the base station at that time.
Precondition: a repeater is registered
Please note: with the base station.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base
For how to reregister the handsets after reset-
ting, if necessary, see page 72.
¢ Add. Features
¤ Remove the cable connections from Repeater Mode
the base station to the router (page 11) Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
and fixed network (page 11).
¤ Remove the base station mains unit
§Yes§ Press the display key to con-
firm the security prompt.
from the socket (page 11).
¤ Press and hold the registration/paging
key (page 1). Setting the default connection
¤ Plug the mains unit back into the power
You can make settings according to
socket.
whether you want to make calls via VoIP or
¤ Press and hold the registration/paging fixed network by default.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony
key (at least 2 sec.).
¤ Release the registration/paging key. ¢ Default Line
The base station has now been reset.
VoIP / Fixed Line
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
Activating/deactivating music
When making calls:
on hold ¤ Press the talk key c briefly if you
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base want to make the call via the default
connection.
Music on hold
Select and press §OK§ to activate
¤ Press and hold the talk key c if you
want to make the call via the other con-
or deactivate music on hold
nection type.
(½ = on).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

65
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Base station settings

Updating the base station Please note:

firmware – The firmware update can last up to 3 min-
utes.
– When updating from the Internet, checks
If necessary, you can update your base sta- are made to ensure that no newer version
tion firmware. of the firmware exists. If this is not the case,
The firmware update is downloaded the operation is terminated and a message
directly from the Internet by default. The is issued to that effect.
relevant website is preconfigured in your – If an error arises during a firmware update
from a local PC, the most recent version of
phone. the firmware is automatically downloaded
As an alternative to uploading the from the Internet. Your phone should
firmware via the Internet, it can also be therefore be connected to the Internet dur-
loaded from a local PC. You can specify the ing every firmware update.
PC via the Web configurator (page 99).
This setting applies only to the following Automatic firmware update
firmware update. Your phone will check daily whether a
Precondition: newer firmware update is available via the
Internet on the Siemens configuration
The base station is in idle status, i.e.:
server. If this is the case, the message
u No calls are being made via the fixed New firmware available will be displayed
network or VoIP. when the handset is in idle status, and the
u There is no internal connection message key f flashes.
between the registered handsets. f Press the message key.
u No other handset has opened the base
§Yes§ Press the display key to con-
station menu. firm the prompt.
The firmware will be loaded onto your
Starting the firmware update manually
phone.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base
Software Update Please note:
– If you reply to the request with §No§, the dis-
Select and press §OK§.
play will not be repeated. The message
~ Enter the system PIN and press New firmware available will only be shown
§OK§. again if a newer version of the firmware
than the one rejected is available.
The base station establishes a connection – You can specify the automatic version
to the Internet or to the local PC. check via the Web configurator (page 100).
§Yes§ Press the display key to start
the firmware update.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

66
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Making VoIP settings

Making VoIP settings Changing settings without the

connection assistant
In order to be able to use VoIP, you must
set a few parameters for your phone. You can change your provider's VoIP set-
You can make the following settings using tings and the VoIP user data via the menu
your handset. without starting the connection assistant.
u Download the general access data for
your VoIP provider from the Siemens Downloading your VoIP provider's
configuration server and store them on settings
your phone. The general settings for various VoIP pro-
u Enter your personal access data for viders are available for download on the
your first VoIP account (first VoIP phone Internet. The relevant website is precon-
number). You can configure the access figured in your phone.
data for five further VoIP account via
Precondition: your phone is connected to
the phone's Web configurator.
the Internet.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ VoIP
u Setting the phone's IP address in the
LAN.
~ Enter the system PIN and press
Please note: §OK§.
You can set these and other parameters Select Provider
conveniently via the Web configurator on a
PC connected to your local network (see
Select and press §OK§.
page 78). The phone establishes a connection to the
Internet.
q
The connection assistant on your phone
Select country and press §OK§.
can help you make the settings.
q Select VoIP provider and press
§OK§.
Using the connection assistant Your VoIP provider data is downloaded
The connection assistant starts automati- and saved in your phone.
cally when you set the handset and base
station up for the first time, or when you Please note:
– If an error occurs during the download, an
try to connect to the Internet before mak-
error message will be displayed. You can
ing the necessary settings. find possible messages and measures in the
You can also start the connection assistant table on page 102.
via the menu: – You can make and adapt the general set-
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony
tings for your VoIP provider manually via
your phone's Web configurator, see
Connection Assist. page 84.
Select and press §OK§.
Automatic update for the VoIP provider
~ Enter the system PIN and press
settings
§OK§.
After the first download of the VoIP pro-
For how to enter VoIP settings using the
vider settings, your phone will check daily
connection assistant, see page 12.
whether a newer version of the file for
your VoIP provider is available via Internet
Version 4, 16.09.2005

on the Siemens configuration server. If

this is the case, when the handset is in idle
status the message New profile available

67
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Making VoIP settings

will be displayed, and the message key Setting the phone's IP address
f flashes.
f Press the message key.
in LAN
§Yes§ Press the display key to con- The base station requires an IP address in
firm the prompt. order to be "recognised" by the LAN.
~ Enter the system PIN and press The IP address can be assigned to the base
§OK§. station (by the router) automatically or
The new data for your VoIP provider will be manually.
downloaded and saved on the phone. u If performed dynamically, the router's
DHCP server automatically assigns the
Please note: base station an IP address. The base
– If you reply to the request with §No§, the dis- station's IP address can be changed
play will not be repeated. The message according to router settings.
New profile available will only be shown
again if a newer version of the VoIP settings u If performed manually/statically, you
than the one rejected is available. assign the base station a static IP
– You can specify the automatic version address. This may be necessary
check via the Web configurator (page 100). depending on your network configura-
tion.
Entering/changing VoIP user data
Please note:
The VoIP settings must also be extended – For how to make the local network settings
for your personal data. You will receive all on the Web configurator, turn to page 82.
necessary data from your VoIP provider. – To assign the IP address dynamically, the
DHCP server on the router must be acti-
Please note: vated. Please also read the user guide for
Please note when making these entries that your router.

v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base
the VoIP user data is case sensitive. To enter
text see page 112.
¢ Local Network
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony ~
¢ VoIP (enter system PIN)
Enter the system PIN and press
¢ Provider Registr.
§OK§.
¤ Change multiple line input:
¤ Change multiple line input: IP Address Type:
Username: Select Static or Dynamic. Select
Enter the user name (caller ID) for your
If you select Static, you must manually
VoIP provider account. The Username is
define the IP address and the subnet
usually identical to your Internet phone
mask for the base station in the next
number (the first part of your SIP
lines, as well as the standard gateway
address see page 85).
and DNS server.
Authent. Name: / Authent. Password:
IP Address:
Enter the provider-dependent access
For IP Address Type = Dynamic:
data that has to be transferred by the
phone to the SIP service at registration. The IP address that is currently assigned
¤ Click §Save§ to save the settings. to the base station will be displayed. It
cannot be amended.
For IP Address Type = Static:
Version 4, 16.09.2005

68
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Making VoIP settings

Enter the IP address that is to be Activating/deactivating display

assigned to the base station (overwrit-
ing the current settings). of VoIP status messages
192.168.2.2 has been preset.
If the function is activated, a VoIP status
For the IP address see also page 126. code for your service provider is displayed.
Subnet Mask: Activate the function e.g. if you have prob-
For IP Address Type = Dynamic: lems with VoIP connections. You will
The subnet mask that is currently receive a provider-specific status code,
assigned to the base station will be dis- which supports the service when the
played. It cannot be amended. problem is analysed. You will find a table
For IP Address Type = Static: with the possible status screens in the
Enter the IP address that is to be appendix (page 105).
assigned to the base station (overwrit- v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ VoIP
ing the current settings). ~ Enter the system PIN and press
The default setting is 255.255.255.0 §OK§.
For the subnet mask see also page 129. Show Stat. on HS
DNS Server: Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
For IP Address Type = Static:
Enter the IP address for the preferred Please note:
For how to make the setting on the Web con-
DNS server. The DNS server (Domain
figurator, see page 101.
Name System) converts the symbolic
name of a server (DNS name) into the
public IP address for the server when Check the base station
the connection is made.
MAC address
You can specify your router's IP address
here. The router forwards phone Depending on your network configura-
address requests to its DNS server. tion, you may have to enter your base sta-
192.168.2.1 has been preset. tion MAC address, for example, into your
Default Gateway: router's access control list. You can check
For IP Address Type = Static: your base station MAC address:
Enter the IP address for the standard v55O2Q
gateway, by means of which the local The base station MAC address is displayed.
network is connected with the Internet. a Press and hold (idle status).
This is generally the local (private) IP
address for your router (e.g.
192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this
information to be able to access the
Internet.
192.168.2.1 has been preset.
¤ Click §Save§ to save the settings.
Please note:
You can find notes on the IP address and the
subnet mask on page 82 and in the glossary on
Version 4, 16.09.2005

page 126/page 129.

69
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / settings_bs_hs_pabx.fm / 28.3.07

Operating the base station on the PABX

Operating the base station Changing the pause after the recall key
You can change the length of the pause if
on the PABX your PABX requires this (refer to the user
guide for your PABX).
v 55O11
The following settings are only necessary
when your PABX requires them; see the
PABX user guide. The settings only con- ~ Enter a number for the length
cern fixed network connections. of the pause (1 = 1 sec.;
2 = 2 secs.; 3 = 3 secs.;
You cannot send or receive SMS messages
4 = 6 secs.) and press §OK§.
on PABXs that do not support Calling Line
Identification. a Press and hold (idle status).

Setting the flashing time Switching temporarily to

tone dialling (DTMF)
You can set the flashing time.
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Telephony If your PABX still operates with dial pulsing
¢ Fixed Line ¢ Recall (DP), but you need touch tone dialling
q Select flashing time and press (DTMF) for a connection (e.g. to listen to
§OK§. the network mailbox) you must switch to
The current language is indicated by ½.
touch tone dialling for the call.

a
Precondition: You are currently conduct-
Press and hold (idle status). ing an external call via the fixed network
or you have dialled an external fixed net-
Setting pauses work number or an external call is sig-
nalled.
§Options§ Open menu.
Changing pause after line seizure
Tone Dialing Select and press §OK§.
You can set the length of the pause Touch tone dialling is now activated for
inserted between pressing the talk key this call only.
c and sending the phone number.
v55O1L
~ Enter a number for the length
of the pause (1 = 1 sec.;
2 = 3 secs.; 3 = 7 secs.) and
press §OK§.
a Press and hold (idle status).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

70
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using the network mailbox

Using the network mailbox Configuring the network mailbox for fast
access and entering the network mailbox
number
Some fixed network providers and VoIP
providers offer answering machines on v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Voice Mail
the network – network mailboxes. ¢ Set Key 1
You can use the relevant network mailbox Network Mailb.
if you have requested it from your fixed Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
network or VoIP provider. ~ Enter the number for the net-
The network mailbox only answers incom- work mailbox.
ing calls made via the relevant line (fixed §Save§ Press the display key.
network or VoIP). To record all calls, you a Press and hold (idle status).
should therefore set up network mail-
boxes for both fixed network and VoIP. Fast access is automatically activated.
The setting for fast access applies to all
Please note: Gigaset S45 handsets.
You can only set up fast access to one of the
network mailboxes. Please note:
You can assign speed dial numbers to the – If no number has been entered: press and
number for another network mailbox in the hold 1 to enter the number.
directory (e.g. the 2 key) (page 34). – To deactivate fast access, you must delete
You must assign the speed dial numbers to the number.
every handset that is registered.
Calling the network mailbox
Configuring the network mailbox 1 Press and hold. You are con-
nected straight to the network
for fast access mailbox.
With fast access you can dial a network d If necessary, press the hands-
mailbox directly. free key. You hear the network
The network mailbox is preconfigured for mailbox announcement.
fast access. You only need to enter the
Please note:
number of a network mailbox. If you have set an automatic area code
The number is dialled via the default con- (page 94), the area code is also prefixed to the
nection. number of the network answer machine if it
does not start with 0 and is dialled via VoIP.
Tip: A fixed network answer machine If the phone number for your network provider
should always be controlled via the fixed does not begin with 0, ask your VoIP provider.
network connection. If VoIP is set as the A network mailbox can frequently be accessed
default connection on your phone, add a via an alternative phone number (with dialling
star (*) to the end of the number of the code) too.
network mailbox. The connection is then
established via the fixed network.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

71
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Viewing the network mailbox Registering another Gigaset S45

handset on the Gigaset SP450 IP
report
Before you can use your handset, you
When a message is recorded, you receive must register it to a base station.
a call from the network mailbox. If you You must initiate handset registration on
have requested Calling Line Identification, the handset and on the base station.
the display shows the network mailbox
number. If the handset was registered successfully,
the display will show the internal name for
If you take the call, the new messages are the handset, e.g. Int 1. If it does not, repeat
played back. the procedure.
If you do not take the call, the network On the handset
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Handset
mailbox number will be saved in the
missed calls list and the message key
flashes (page 37). ¢ Register H/Set
~ Enter the system PIN of the
base station (the default is
Using several handsets 0000) and press §OK§. The dis-
play shows e.g. Regstr.Proce-
dure and Base 2 flash.
Registering handsets On the base station
¤ Within 60 secs. press and hold the reg-
You can register up to six handsets to your istration/paging key on the base station
base station. (page 1) (min. 1 sec.).
You can register your Gigaset S45 handset The handset is assigned the lowest unas-
on up to four base stations. signed internal number (1–6). If several
handsets are registered to the base sta-
Please note: tion, the internal number is shown in the
– If there are several handsets registered to display after registration, e.g. INT 2. This
your base station, then you can use one to means that the handset has been assigned
make a call via the Internet and the other to
make a call via the Internet or the fixed net- the internal number 2.
work at the same time. A maximum of two
internal connections can also be made. Please note:
– As a rule, all calls from a registered GAP If six handsets are already registered to the
handset are dialled via the connection base station, there are two options:
types (fixed network or VoIP, see page 65) – The handset with the internal number 6 is
that have been set up as Default Line. If you in idle status: the handset you wish to reg-
want to establish a connection via the other ister is assigned the number 6. The handset
connection type, enter a "*" (star) after the that was previously number 6 is de-regis-
phone number. Example: tered.
049891234567*. – The handset with the internal number 6 is
– After registration, all the phone numbers being used: the handset you wish to regis-
for the phone will be assigned to the hand- ter cannot be registered.
set as receiving numbers. It will use the
fixed network number and the first VoIP
number as sending numbers. For how to
change the assignments, see page 93.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

72
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Registering other handsets on the Locating a handset ("paging")

Gigaset SP450 IP
You can locate your handset using the
You can register other Gigaset handsets
base station.
and handsets for other devices with GAP
functionality as follows. ¤ Press the registration/paging key on the
base station (page 1) briefly.
On the handset ¤ All handsets will ring at the same time
¤ Start to register the handset as ("paging"), even if ringer tones are
described in its user guide. switched off.

On the base station Ending paging

¤ Press and hold the registration/paging ¤ Press the registration/paging key on the
key on the base station (page 1) base station (page 1) briefly.
(min. 1 sec.). Or

Please note:
¤ Press talk key c on a handset.
You can also make changes on the base station
with a Gigaset C45 handset. Changing the base station
De-registering handsets If your handset is registered to more than
one base station, you can set it to a partic-
You can de-register any registered handset ular base station or to the base station
from any registered Gigaset S45 handset. that has the best reception (Best Base).
u v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Handset
¢ Select Base
Open list of internal users.
The handset you are currently
using is indicated by < . s Select one of the registered
q Select the handset to be de- base stations or Best Base and
registered. press §OK§.
§Options§ Press the display key.
De-reg. H/Set No.
Select and press §OK§.
~ Enter the base station system
PIN (default setting: 0000).
§Yes§ Press the display key to con-
firm the prompt.
a Press and hold (idle status).
The handset is de-registered immediately,
even if it is not in idle status.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

73
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Changing a handset's internal Changing the name of a handset

number The names "INT 1", "INT 2" etc. are assigned
automatically at registration. You can
A handset is automatically assigned the
change these names. The changed name
lowest free number on registration. In the
is displayed in every handset's list.
list of internal subscribers, the handset is
sorted according to its internal number. u Open list of handsets. Your
own handset is indicated by <.
You can change the internal number of all
registered handsets (1–6). Numbers 1–6 s Select handset.
can only be assigned once each. §Edit§ Press the display key.
u Open list of handsets. Your X Delete previous name if neces-
own handset is indicated by <. sary.
§Options§ Press the display key. ~ Enter the new name
Edit H/Set No. (max. 10 characters).
Select and press §OK§. The list of §Save§ Press the display key.
handsets and their internal a Press and hold (idle status).
numbers will be displayed.
The internal number for the Please note:
first handset flashes. If you delete the current handset name and
q Select handset. then press §Save§ without entering a new name,

~
the handset will automatically be allocated the
Enter the new internal number standard name "INT x" (x= internal number).
(1–6). The handset's old
number is overwritten.
q~ If necessary, select further
Making internal calls
handsets and change num- Internal calls to other handsets registered
bers. on the same base station are free.
After all the changes are completed:
Calling a specific handset
§Save§ Press the display key to save
the input. u Initiate internal call.
a Press and hold (idle status). ~ Enter the number of the hand-
set.
You will hear the error tone if an internal
number has been allocated twice. Or:
¤ Repeat the procedure with a free u Initiate internal call.
number. s Select handset.
c Press the talk key.

Calling all handsets ("group call")

u Initiate internal call.
* Press the star key. All handsets
are called.

Ending a call
a
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Press the end call key.

74
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Transferring a call to another handset Ending a consultation call

You can forward (connect) an external §End§ Press the display key.
call, made via fixed network or VoIP, to You are reconnected with the external
another handset. subscriber.
u Open list of handsets. Initiating a conference call
The external caller hears
music on hold if activated §Conf.§ Press the display key.
(page 65). You are in a three-way conference call
s Select a handset or Call All and with the external and the internal sub-
press §OK§. scriber.
When the internal participant answers: If the internal subscriber who has been
¤ If necessary announce the external call. called ends the call (press end call key
a), you will be connected with the
a Press the end call key. external subscriber. If you press end call
The external call is transferred to the other key a, the external call will be trans-
handset. ferred to the internal subscriber.
If the internal participant does not answer
or the line is busy, press the display key Accepting/rejecting call waiting during
§End§, to return to the external call. an internal call
When transferring a call you can also press If you get an external call while conduct-
the end call key a before the internal ing an internal call, you will hear the call
participant lifts the receiver. waiting tone (short tone). With Calling
Then, if the internal participant does not Line Identification, the caller's number will
answer or the line is busy, the call will appear in the display.
automatically return to you (the display
will show Recall).
Ending an internal call, accepting an
external call
Initiating internal consultation call, §Accept§ Press the display key.
conference call The internal call is ended. You are con-
nected to the external caller.
You are talking to an external participant
(via fixed network or VoIP) and can call an Rejecting the external call
internal participant at the same time to Precondition: the external call is waiting
hold a consultation call. on the fixed network connection.
u Open list of handsets. §Reject§ Press the display key.
The external caller hears
music on hold if activated The call waiting tone is turned off. You
(page 65). remain connected with the internal sub-
scriber. The ringer tone can still be heard
s Select handset and press §OK§. on other registered handsets.
When an internal participant answers you
can speak to them. Please note:
You can not reject calls on the VoIP connection.
You have the following options:
Version 4, 16.09.2005

75
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Using a handset as a room Caution!

monitor – You should always check the operation
of the room monitor before use. For
example, test its sensitivity. Check the
If the room monitor is activated, a previ- connection if you are diverting the room
ously stored destination number is called monitor to an outside number.
as soon as a set noise level is reached in – When the function is switched on the hand-
the room. set's operating time is severely reduced. If
necessary, place the handset on the base
You can store an internal or external station. This ensures that the batteries do
number in your handset as the destination not run down.
number. – Ideally the handset should be positioned 1
The room monitor call to an external to 2 metres away from the baby. The micro-
number stops after around 90 seconds. phone must be directed towards the baby.
– The connection to which the room monitor
The room monitor call to an internal
is diverted must not be blocked by an acti-
number (handset) stops after around vated answer machine.
3 minutes (depending on the base
station). During use as a room monitor,
all keys are barred except for the end call
Activating the room monitor and
key a. The speaker of the handset is
entering the number to be called
muted. The end call key can only be used v ¢ í Add. Features ¢ Room Monitor
to deactivate the handset. ¤ Change multiple line input:
When the room monitor is activated, Room M.:
incoming calls to the handset are indi- Select On to activate.
cated without a ringer tone and are only
shown on the screen. The display and Call to:
keypad are not illuminated and advisory Press the display key §Edit§ and enter des-
tones are also turned off. tination number.
External number: Select number from
If you accept an incoming call, the room
the directory or enter directly. Only the
monitor mode is suspended for the dura-
last 4 characters are displayed.
tion of the call, but the function remains
activated. Internal number: Delete any stored
external number. §INT§ s (select hand-
If you switch off the handset, the room set or Call All, if all registered handsets
monitor mode is deactivated. You must are to be called) §OK§.
reactivate the function when you switch
the handset back on. Store number with Save.
Level:
Set noise level sensitivity (Low or High).
¤ Save changes (page 112).
The function is now activated. With v,
you can move directly to settings.

Please note:
An external number will be dialled via the set
standard connection (VoIP or fixed network).
If the number is to be dialled via the non-
standard connection, enter a star (*) at the
Version 4, 16.09.2005

end of the number.

76
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / T-NetBox_SAG-registration.fm / 28.3.07

Using several handsets

Changing previously set external

destination number
v ¢ í Add. Features ¢ Room Monitor
s Scroll to the Call to: line.
§Edit§ Press the display key.
X Delete existing number.
¤ Enter number as described in "Activat-
ing the room monitor and entering the
number to be called" (page 76).
¤ Save changes (page 112).
Changing previously set internal
destination number
v ¢ í Add. Features ¢ Room Monitor
s Scroll to the Call to: line.
§Edit§ Press the display key.
§Yes§ Press the display key to con-
firm the prompt.
¤ Enter number as described in "Activat-
ing the room monitor and entering the
number to be called" (page 76).
¤ Save changes (page 112).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

77
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Web configurator u Obtain information about your phone's

status (firmware version, MAC address
etc.).
The Web configurator is the Web interface
for your handset. It allows you to make the
settings for your phone's base station via Connecting PC with
your PC's Web browser. Web configurator
Please note:
Depending on your VoIP provider, it is possible
¤ Launch the Web browser on your PC.
that you will be unable to change individual Precondition: The settings of an avail-
settings in the Web configurator. able firewall on the PC allow the PC and
telephone to communicate with each
other.
Configuring the phone via ¤ Enter the phone's IP address into the
your PC address field of the Web browser,
e.g. http://192.168.2.2.
Preconditions: Your phone's IP address can change if
u A standard Web browser is installed on you have activated dynamic IP address
the PC, e.g. Internet Explorer version assignment (page 82).
6.0 or higher, or Firefox version 1.0.4 or You can check the phone's current IP
higher. address on the handset (page 68).
u The phone and PC are connected with ¤ Press the return key.
each other via a router. A connection is established to the phone's
Web configurator.
Please note:
– The phone is not blocked while you make
your settings in the Web configurator. You Registering, setting the
can also use your phone to make calls or
change base station or handset settings on
Web configurator language
your handset at the same time.
– While you are connected to the Web config- Once you have successfully established
urator, it is blocked to other users. It cannot the connection, the Web page Login will
be accessed by more than one user at any be displayed in the Web browser.
time.
You can select the language you want the
With the Web configurator on your phone menus and Web configurator dialogs to be
displayed in. The language that is cur-
you have the following options:
rently selected is displayed in the top field
u Configure your phone access to the of the Web page.
local network (IP address, gateway to
the Internet). ¤ If necessary, click on to open the list
of available languages.
u Configure your phone for VoIP.
¤ Select the language.
u Define the data server for firmware
updates and load new firmware onto
¤ In the bottom field of the Web page,
enter your phone's system PIN (default
the phone if necessary.
setting: 0000) to access the Web con-
u Copy contacts from the Outlook figurator functions.
address book on your PC into the hand-
¤ Click on OK.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

set directories or back up your hand-

set's directories on your PC.

78
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Once you have successfully registered, a Logging off

Home opens with general information on
the Web configurator. In the menu bar (page 80) at the top right
of every Web page in the Web configura-
Please note: tor, you will see the command Log Off.
– If you have forgotten your system PIN, you Click on Log Off to log off from the Web
must restore your device's factory settings.
configurator.
Please note that this will restore all other
settings too (page 65).
– If you do not make any entries for a lengthy Warning:
period (around 10 minutes), you will be Always use the command Log Off to end the
automatically logged off. The next time connection to the Web configurator. If, for
you try to make an entry or open a Web example, you close the Web browser without
page, the Login Web page will be displayed. logging off beforehand, it is possible that
Enter the system PIN again to log in again. access to the Web configurator will be blocked
for a few minutes.
– Entries that had not yet been saved on the
phone before automatic log-off are lost.
Structure of the Web pages
The Web pages contain the UI elements
displayed in see Figure 2.

Navigation area Working area Buttons Menu bar

Figure 2 Example of the structure of a Web page

Version 4, 16.09.2005

79
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Menu bar Working area

In the menu bar, the Web configurator Depending on the function selected, infor-
menus are depicted in the form of tab mation or dialog boxes are displayed in
pages. the working area, which allow you to
make or change your phone settings.
The following menus are available:
u Home Making changes
The start screen is opened once you Make settings for entry fields, lists or
have registered with the Web configu- options.
rator. It contains information on the u There may be restrictions regarding the
Web configurator functions. possible values for a field, e.g. entering
u Settings (page 81) special characters or certain value
This menu allows you to make settings ranges.
on your phone. u To open a list, click on . You can
u Status (page 101) choose between default values.
This menu gives you information about u There are two kinds of options:
your phone. – Options in a list, from which you can
If you click on the Settings menu, a list with activate one or several options.
this menu's functions is displayed in the Active, i.e. selected, options are
navigation area (see below). highlighted with , non-active
options with . You can activate an
You will find the Log Off function to the
option by clicking on . The status
right of the menu bar on every Web page
of the other options on the list does
(page 79).
not change. You can deactivate an
option by clicking on .
Please note:
You will find an overview of the Web configu- – Alternative options The active
rator menu on page 20. option on the list is highlighted with
, and the non-active with .
Navigation area You can activate an option by click-
ing on . The previously activated
In the navigation area, the functions of the option is deactivated. You can only
menu selected in the menu bar (page 80) deactivate an option by activating
are listed. another option.
If you click on a function, the associated
page opens in the working area with infor- Applying changes
mation and/or fields for your inputs. As soon as you have made your change on
If a function is assigned subfunctions, a page, activate the new setting on the
these are displayed with the function as phone by clicking on Set.
soon as you click on the function. The rel- If your input in a field does not comply
evant page for the first subfunction is dis- with the rules for this field, an appropriate
played in the working area. error message will be displayed. You can
then repeat the input.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

80
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Warning: Setting the phone with

Changes that have not been saved on your
phone are lost if you move to another Web
Web configurator
page or if the connection to the Web configu-
rator is terminated, e.g. due to exceeding the You can make the following settings using
time limit (page 79). the Web configurator:
u Connecting your phone to the local
Buttons network (page 82)
Buttons are displayed in the bottom sec- u Configuring for the telephony
tion of the working area. – Make VoIP provider settings
Set (page 84)
Save entries on the phone – Configure VoIP accounts
Cancel – Specify name of the fixed network
Reject changes made on the Web page – Activate/deactivate the Gigaset.net
and reload the settings that are cur- connection
rently saved on your phone to the Web
– Make settings to improve voice qual-
page.
ity for the VoIP connections
– Assign VoIP phone numbers to indi-
Opening Web pages vidual handsets and the answer
machine
A brief outline of the navigation to the
u User-specific dialling rules (page 94)
individual Web configurator functions is
given below. u Type of DTMF signalling (for remote
operation of a network mailbox)
Example: u Data server for firmware update down-
Setting DTMF signalling loads (page 99)
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Advanced Settings u Displaying VoIP status messages on
your handset (page 100)
To open this Web page, carry out the fol-
lowing steps after registration:
¤ Click on the Settings menu in the menu
bar.
¤ Click on the Telephony function in the
navigation area.
The subfunctions of Telephony are dis-
played in the navigation tree.
¤ Click on the Advanced Settings
subfunction.
The Web page from see Figure 2 will be
shown in the Web browser.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

81
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

IP Configuration If necessary, check the settings on the

router.
Assigning the IP address Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask for your device's
Make the necessary settings for operating IP address. For addresses from the
your phone in your local network and to address block 192.168.0.1 –
connect it to the Internet. For more 192.168.255.254, the subnet mask
detailed explanations on the individual 255.255.255.0 is generally used. This
components/terms, see the glossary is preconfigured when the phone is
(page 122). supplied.
¤ Open the following Web page
Settings ¢ IP Configuration.
Default gateway
Enter the IP address for the standard
¤ In the Address Assignment area, select gateway, by means of which the local
the IP address type. network is connected with the Internet.
Select Obtained automatically if you want This is generally the local (private) IP
your phone to be assigned a dynamic IP address for your router (e.g.
address by a DHCP server in your local net- 192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this
work. No further settings are necessary for information to be able to access the
the local network. Internet.
Select Static if you would like to set up a 192.168.2.1 has been preset.
static IP address for your phone. A static IP Preferred DNS server
address is useful, for example, if port for- Enter the IP address for the preferred
warding or a DMZ is set up on the router DNS server. DNS (Domain Name Sys-
for the phone. tem) allows you to assign public IP
The following fields are displayed when addresses to symbolic names.
you select IP address type = Static: The DNS server is required to convert
IP address the DNS name into the IP address when
Enter an IP address for you phone. This connection is being established to a
IP address allows it to be reached by server.
other subscribers in your local network You can specify your router's IP address
(e.g. PC). here. The router forwards phone
192.168.2.2 has been preset. address requests to its DNS server.
Please note the following: 192.168.2.1 has been preset.
– The IP address must be from the Alternate DNS server (optional)
address block for private use that is Enter the IP address for the alternative
used in the router. This is generally DNS server that should be used in situ-
in the range 192.168.0.1 – ations where the preferred DNS server
192.168.255.254 with Subnet mask cannot be reached.
255.255.255.0. The subnet mask Click on Set to save the changes.
determines that the first three parts Click on Cancel to reject the changes.
of the IP address must be identical
for all subscribers in your LAN.
– The static IP address must not
belong to the address block (IP pool
range) that is reserved for the DHCP
Version 4, 16.09.2005

server. It must also not be used by

another device on the router.

82
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Allow access from other networks Configuring telephone

The default setting for you phone is that
you can only access your phone's Web
connections
configurator via a PC that is in the same You can configure up to seven phone
local network as your phone. The subnet numbers on your phone: your fixed net-
mask of the PC must match that of the work number and six VoIP phone num-
phone. bers.
You can also allow access from PCs in You need to set up a VoIP account with a
other networks. VoIP provider for each VoIP phone num-
ber. You must save the access data for
Warning: each account and for the relevant VoIP
Expansion of access entitlement to other net-
works increases the risk of unauthorised provider in the phone. You can assign a
access. name to each connection (VoIP and fixed
It is therefore recommended to deactivate network).
remote access again if you no longer need it. To configure the connections:
¤ Open the following Web page ¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ IP Configuration. Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.
¤ In the Remote Management area, activate A list (see Figure 3) will be shown with all
the option Yes to permit access from possible connections that you can config-
other networks. ure, or have already configured, for your
To deactivate remote access, click on phone.
the No option. Access is then limited to
PCs in your own local network.
Access to the Web configurator services
from other networks is only possible if
your router is set accordingly. The router
must pass on the service requests from
"outside" to Port 80 (standard port) of the
phone. Please also read the user guide for
your router.
To establish a connection, the public IP
address or the DNS name of the router
and, where applicable, the port number
on the router, must be indicated in the
Web browser of the remote PC.

Figure 3 List of possible connections

Version 4, 16.09.2005

83
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

The list will show the following: This will open a Web page where you can
Name make the settings needed. Read on:
Name of the connection. This will show u in the section "Configuring the VoIP
the name that you have defined for the connection" on page 84 or
connection (page 85, page 89) or the u in the section "Configuring the fixed
default name (IP 1 to IP6 for VoIP con- network connection" on page 89
nections, Fixed Line for fixed network
connections). Configuring the VoIP connection
Status
Open the Web page:
The status of the connection will be
shown for VoIP connections: ¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.
registered
The connection is activated. The phone
¤ Click on the Edit button behind the VoIP
connection that you want to configure
has been successfully registered. You
or whose configuration you want to
can use the connection to make calls.
change.
Disabled
This will open a Web page where you can
The connection is deactivated. The
make the settings that your phone needs
phone is not registering with the corre-
to access your provider's VoIP server.
sponding account with the VoIP serv-
ice. You can not use the connection to The Web page always displays the follow-
make or receive calls. ing areas:
Registration failed / Server not accessible u IP Connection (page 85),
(Examples) u Personal Provider Data and (page 85)
The phone could not be registered with u Call Forwarding (page 86).
the VoIP service, e.g. because the VoIP The areas
access data is incomplete or incorrect, u General Provider Data (page 86) and
or because the phone is not connected
to the Internet. There is information u Network (page 87)
about this in the section entitled "Ques- can be shown and hidden by clicking on
tions and answers" from page 102. the buttons Show Advanced Settings and
Active Hide Advanced Settings.
You can use the option in the Active col- You must enter the VoIP provider's general
umn to activate (½) and deactivate (Õ) access data in these areas. You can down-
VoIP connections. If a connection is load the general access data for many VoIP
deactivated, the phone will not register providers from the Internet (page 89).
for this connection. The connection can
¤ Make the settings on the Web page.
be activated/deactivated by clicking
directly on the option. The change does ¤ Save them in the phone, see page 88.
not need to be saved. ¤ Active the connection if necessary, see
page 88.
To configure a connection or to change
the configuration of a connection:
¤ Click on the Edit button behind the con-
nection.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

84
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Area: IP Connection Area: Personal Provider Data

Connection Name or Number Enter the configuration data that is neces-
Enter a name for the VoIP connection or sary for accessing your VoIP provider's SIP
the VoIP phone number (max. 16 char- service. This data can be obtained from
acters). The connection will be shown your VoIP provider.
under this name on the handset and in Authentication Name
the Web configurator interface, e.g. Specify the registration or authentica-
when assigning sending and receiving tion ID agreed with your VoIP provider.
numbers (page 93), with call display The registration ID serves as the access
(page 22). ID that your phone must specify when
Provider registering with the SIP proxy/registrar
The name of your VoIP provider will be server. The Authentication Name is
shown if you have already selected it. mainly identical to the Username, i.e. to
Click on the Select VoIP Provider button your Internet phone number.
to select your provider, and to start Authentication password
downloading the general data for the Enter the password that you have
VoIP provider from the Internet if agreed with your VoIP provider in the
required. To find out how to do this, Authentication password field. The phone
please read "Selecting the VoIP provider needs the password when registering
and downloading the VoIP provider with the SIP proxy/registrar server.
data" on page 89. Username
Enter the caller ID for your VoIP pro-
Please note: vider account. This ID is usually identi-
– If you click on the Select VoIP Provider but-
ton, any changes that have been made to
cal to the first part of your SIP address
the Web page will be saved and checked. (URI, your Internet phone number).
Values may need to be corrected before the Example: If your SIP address is
Select VoIP Provider operation is started. "[email protected]", enter
– The downloaded VoIP provider data will be "987654321" in Username.
entered in the areas General Provider Data
(page 86) and Network (page 87), so that, Display name (optional)
generally speaking, no further settings Enter any name that should be shown
need to be made. in the other party's display when you
If the general data for your VoIP provider is call him via the Internet (example:
not available for download, you will need to Anna Sand). All characters in the UTF8
make these settings yourself as described
below.
character set (Unicode) are permitted.
This name must not exceed 32 charac-
ters
If you do not enter a name, your
Username VoIP phone number will be
displayed.
Ask your VoIP provider if this feature is
supported.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

85
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Area: Call Forwarding Proxy server address

You can also forward calls for this VoIP The SIP proxy is your VoIP provider's
number to another external number (VoIP, gateway server. Enter the IP address or
fixed network or mobile phone). The for- the (fully-qualified) DNS name of your
warding is done via VoIP. SIP proxy server. Example:
myprovider.com.
The Call Forwarding area is where you
define whether and when calls for this Proxy server port
VoIP number should be forwarded to Enter the number of the communica-
another number. tion port that the SIP proxy uses to send
and receive signalling data (SIP port).
You can also use the handset to set the
diversion and activate/deactivate it, see Port 5060 is used by most VoIP provid-
page 32. ers.
Status Registrar server
Activate the On / Off option to activate Enter the (fully-qualified) DNS name or
or deactivate the call forwarding. the IP address of the registrar server.
The registrar is needed when the
When
phone is registered. It assigns the pub-
You choose when an incoming call
lic IP address/port number to your SIP
should be forward: When busy / No reply
address (Username@Domain) that were
/ Always.
used by the phone at registration. With
Call number most VoIP providers, the registrar
Enter the phone number to which the server is identical to the SIP server.
calls should be forwarded. Note that Example: reg.myprovider.com.
you may have to enter the area code
Registrar server port
when diverting to a fixed network
Enter the communication port used in
number in the same area (depending
the registrar. It is mainly port 5060 that
on your VoIP provider and the setting
is used.
for the automatic area code, see
page 94). Registration refresh time
Enter the time intervals at which the
The settings only affect the selected VoIP
phone should repeat the registration
phone number.
with the VoIP server (SIP proxy) (a
Area: General Provider Data request will be sent to establish a ses-
sion). The repeat is required so that the
If you have downloaded the general set-
entry of the phone in the tables of the
tings for the VoIP provider from the Sie-
SIP proxy is retained and the phone can
mens configuration server (page 89),
therefore be reached. The repeat will
then the fields in this area will be preset
be carried out for all activated VoIP
with the data from this download. Gener-
phone numbers.
ally speaking you will not need to make
any settings in this area. The default is 180 seconds.
Domain If you enter 0 seconds, the registration
Specify the last part of your SIP address will not be repeated periodically.
(URI) here.
Example: For the SIP address
"[email protected]", enter
Version 4, 16.09.2005

"provider.com" in Domain.

86
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Area: Network supplies the data packets along with

the public address.
Please note: The STUN server and outbound proxy are
If you have downloaded the general settings
used alternately to work around the NAT/
for your VoIP provider from the Siemens con-
figuration server (page 89), then some fields firewall in the router.
in this area will be preset with the data from STUN enabled
this download (e.g. the settings for the STUN Click on Yes if you want your phone to
server and the outbound proxy).
use STUN as soon as it is used on a
If your phone is connected to a router with router with asymmetric NAT.
NAT (Network Address Translation) and/or STUN server
a firewall, you must make some settings in Enter the (fully-qualified) DNS name or
this area so that your phone can be the IP address of the STUN server on
reached from the Internet (i.e. can be the Internet.
addressed). If you selected the option Yes in the
Through NAT, the IP addresses of subscrib- STUN enabled field, you must enter a
ers in the LAN are concealed behind the STUN server here.
public IP address of the router. STUN port
Enter the number of the communica-
For incoming calls
tion port on the STUN server. The
If port forwarding is activated or a DMZ is default port is 3478.
set up for the phone on the router, no spe-
STUN refresh time
cial settings are required for incoming
Enter the time intervals at which the
calls.
phone should repeat the registration
If this is not the case, an entry in the NAT with the STUN server. The repeat is
routing table (in the router) is necessary in required so that the entry of the phone
order for the phone to be reached. This in the tables of the STUN server is
entry is created when the phone is regis- retained. The repeat will be carried out
tered with the SIP service. In the interest for all activated VoIP phone numbers.
of security, this entry is automatically
Ask your VoIP provider for the
deleted at certain intervals (session time-
STUN refresh time.
out). The phone must therefore confirm
its registration at certain intervals (see The default is 240 seconds.
NAT refresh time, page 87), so that the If you enter 0 seconds, the registration
entry stays in the routing table. will not be repeated periodically.
NAT refresh time
For outgoing calls
Specify the intervals at which you want
The phone needs its public address in the phone to update its entry in the
order to receive caller voice data. NAT routing table. Specify an interval in
There are two possibilities: seconds that is a little smaller than the
u The phone requests the public address NAT session timeout.
from a STUN server on the Internet As a rule you should not change the
(Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT). preconfigured value for the NAT refresh
STUN can only be used with asymmet- time.
ric NATs and non-blocking firewalls.
u The phone does not direct the connec-
Version 4, 16.09.2005

tion request to the SIP proxy but to an

outbound proxy on the Internet that

87
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Outbound proxy mode Saving settings on phone

Specify when the outbound proxy ¤ Click on Set to save the changes.
should be used.
The Connections list will be shown after
Always saving (see Figure 3 on page 83).
All signalling and voice data sent by the If you want to reject the changes that have
phone is sent to the outbound proxy. been made, click on Cancel. The Web page
Auto is re-loaded with the data saved on the
Data sent by the phone is only sent to phone.
the outbound proxy when the phone is Please note: If you do not make any
connected to a router with symmetric entries for a lengthy period, the connec-
NAT or blocking firewall. If the phone is tion to the Web configurator is automati-
behind an asymmetric NAT, the STUN cally terminated. Unsaved entries are lost.
server is used. If necessary, implement temporary secu-
If you have set STUN enabled = No or rity measures. You can subsequently con-
have not entered a STUN server, the tinue the entry and make changes if nec-
outbound proxy is always used. essary.
Never
Activating new connection
The outbound proxy is not used.
If you have configured a new VoIP connec-
If you do not make an entry in the Out-
tion, you must also activate it.
bound proxy field, the phone behaves
independently of the selected mode, as In the Connections list:
with Never. ¤ Activate the relevant option in the
Outbound proxy Active column (½ = activated).
Enter the (fully qualified) DNS name or Your phone will register itself using the
the IP address of your provider's out- relevant access data with the VoIP pro-
bound proxy. vider. If the registration is successful, after
a short period the Status column will show
Please note: registered for the connection. You can now
With many providers, the outbound proxy is be reached on this VoIP phone number.
identical to the SIP proxy.
Please note:
Outbound proxy port Once the new entry has been made, the VoIP
Enter the number of the communica- phone number for each handset is assigned as
tion port used by the outbound proxy. a receiving number. For how to adjust the
The default port is 5060. assignment, see page 93.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

88
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Selecting the VoIP provider and Configuring the fixed network

downloading the VoIP provider data connection
Profile files with the general access data You can assign a name to your fixed net-
for the most important VoIP providers are work connection. The connection will be
available for download on the Siemens shown under this name on the handset
server on the Internet. The address for the and in the Web configurator interface, e.g.
server is stored in your phone (page 99). when assigning sending and receiving
Navigation: numbers (page 93), with call display
¤ Open the following Web page: (page 22).
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections. ¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.
¤ Click on the Edit button next to the VoIP
connection for which you wish to ¤ In the Fixed Line Connection area, click
download the provider data. on the Edit button.
¤ In the IP Connection area, click on the ¤ Enter your fixed network (fixed line)
Select VoIP Provider button. number or the name of your choice
(max. 16 characters) for your fixed net-
This will display information on the down-
work connection in the Connection Name
load procedure.
or Number field. The default is "Fixed
The phone establishes a connection with Line".
the Siemens server on the Internet. The
download procedure has several steps: Activating/deactivating the
¤ Click on Next. Gigaset.net connection
¤ From the list, select the country for Your phone is assigned a Gigaset.net
which the list of VoIP providers is to be
phone number on delivery. As soon as you
loaded.
¤ Click on Next. have connected your phone to the Inter-
net, you can make calls using the
¤ Select a VoIP provider from the list. If Gigaset.net and receive calls from other
your provider is not included in the list, Gigaset.net subscribers, provided that
select Other Provider. You will then have your Gigaset.net connection has been
to enter all the VoIP data manually activated. You can deactivate the
(page 84). Gigaset.net connection.
¤ Click on Finish. ¤ Open the following Web page:
The data for the provider selected will be Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.
loaded onto your phone. The list of connections will be displayed
(see Figure 3 on page 83).
¤ In the Gigaset.net field use the option in
the Active column to activate (½) or
deactivate (Õ) the Gigaset.net connec-
tion.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

89
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

G729
Please note:
If you do not use your Gigaset.net connection Average voice quality. The necessary
for six weeks, it is automatically deactivated. bandwidth is less than 8 kbit/s per voice
You cannot be reached for calls from the connection.
Gigaset.net.
The connection is reactivated: Both sides of a phone connection (caller/
– as soon as you start a search in the sender side and receiver side) must use
Gigaset.net directory (page 27) or the same voice codec. The voice codec is
– make a call via the Gigaset.net (dial a negotiated between the sender and the
number with #9 at the end) or recipient when establishing a connection.
– activate the connection via the Web config-
urator as described above. You can influence the voice quality by
selecting (bearing in mind the bandwidth
of your DSL connection) the voice codecs
Optimising voice quality for your phone is to use, and specifying the
VoIP connections order in which the codecs are to be sug-
gested when a VoIP connection is estab-
You can make general and connection- lished.
specific settings to improve the voice qual-
ity for VoIP telephony. Area: Settings for Bandwidth
¤ Open the following Web page: The settings in this area influence all VoIP
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Audio. connections (VoIP phone numbers).
The voice quality for VoIP connections is Allow 1 VoIP call only
mainly determined by the voice codec Generally speaking, you can make two
used for transferring the data and the VoIP calls simultaneously on your
available bandwidth of your DSL connec- phone. If, however, your DSL connec-
tion. tion has a narrow bandwidth, there
may be problems if two VoIP calls are
In the case of the voice codec, the voice made at the same time. The data is no
data is digitalised (coded / decoded) and longer transferred properly (long voice
compressed. A "better" codec (better voice delay, data losses etc.).
quality) means more data needs to be to
be transferred, i.e. perfect voice data ¤ Activate the Yes option next to Allow
transfer requires a DSL connection with a 1 VoIP call only to prevent any further
larger bandwidth. parallel VoIP phone connections
being established.
The following voice codecs are supported
by your phone:
¤ If you wish to permit two VoIP con-
nections, activate the No option.
G711 a law / G711 µ law
Excellent voice quality (comparable Please note: If only one VoIP connection is
with ISDN). The necessary bandwidth is permitted, the following VoIP network services
64 kbit/s per voice connection. are no longer available:
– Call waiting
G726 Call waiting is not displayed during a call via
Good voice quality (inferior to that with VoIP.
G.711 but better than with G.729). – External consultation call from a VoIP call
Your phone supports G.726 with a – Toggling and initiating a conference call via
transmission rate of 32 kbit/s per voice VoIP
connection.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

90
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Voice Quality Voice codecs

Default settings for the codecs used are Precondition: The Own Codec preference
stored in your phone: one setting opti- option is activated for the Voice Quality
mised for narrow bandwidths and one in the Settings for Bandwidth area.
setting optimised for wide bandwidths. Select the voice codecs your phone is to
¤ Activate one of the options Optimized use, and specify the order in which the
for low bandwidth / Optimized for high codecs are to be suggested when a VoIP
bandwidth if you wish to accept a connection is established via this VoIP
default setting for all VoIP connec- phone number.
tions. The settings are shown in the ¤ Apply the voice codecs that your
Settings for Connections area and can- phone is to suggest with outgoing
not be changed. calls into the Selected codecs list.
¤ Activate the Own Codec preference To do this, in the Available codecs list
option if you wish to select and set click on the voice codec that you
connection-specific voice codecs want to apply (you can mark several
yourself (see "Area: Settings for Con- entries using the Shift key or the Ctrl
nections"). key). Click on the <Add button.

Area: Settings for Connections

¤ Move the voice codecs that you do
not want the phone to use into the
In this area you can make specific settings Available codecs list.
for each of your VoIP phone numbers. Also, select the voice codecs in the
You can make the following settings for Available codecs list (see above) and
each VoIP phone number configured on click on the Remove> button.
your phone: ¤ Sort the voice codecs in the Selected
Volume for VoIP Calls codecs list into the order in which
Depending on the VoIP provider, it is they should be suggested to the
possible that the received voice/ear- receiving device when a connection
piece volume is too low or too high, so is established. To do this, use the Up
that adjusting the volume via the hand- and Down buttons.
set is not adequate. When establishing a VoIP connection,
Specify whether the received volume the phone suggests the 1st voice codec
range is too high or too low. The follow- in the Selected codecs list to the receiv-
ing options are available: ing device to begin with. If the receiv-
Low ing device does not accept this voice
codec (e.g. because it is not sup-
Voice/earpiece volume is too high. Acti-
ported), the 2nd voice codec on the list
vate this option to reduce the volume
is suggested and so on.
by 6 dB.
If the receiving device does not accept
Normal
any of the voice codecs in the Selected
The voice/earpiece volume does not codecs list, the connection is not estab-
need to be raised/lowered. lished. An appropriate message will be
High displayed on the handset.
Voice/earpiece volume is too low. Acti-
vate this option to reduce the volume
by 6 dB.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

91
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Please note: Voice quality and infrastructure

– You should only deactivate codecs (put With your Gigaset S450 IP you have the
them in the Available codecs list) if there is a opportunity to make calls with good voice
particular reason. The more codecs that are quality via VoIP.
deactivated, the greater the danger that
calls will not be able to be established due However, your phone's performance with
to unsuccessful codec negotiations. VoIP – and therefore the voice quality –
– With incoming calls, all supported voice also depends on the properties of the
codecs are always permitted. entire infrastructure.
The following VoIP provider components
Area: Settings for Codecs
are just some of the things that can influ-
To save additional bandwidth and trans- ence performance:
mission capacity, on VoIP connections that u Router
use codec G729 you can suppress the
transmission of voice packets in pauses u DSLAM
("Silence Suppression"). Then, instead of u DSL transmission line and speed
the background noises in your environ- u Connection paths over the Internet
ment, your caller hears a synthetic noise u If necessary, other applications that
generated in the receiver. also use the DSL connection
Please note: "Silence Suppression" can In VoIP networks, the voice quality is influ-
sometimes lead to deterioration in the enced by various things including the
voice quality. "quality of service" (QoS). If the entire
¤ In the Enable Annex B for codec G729 infrastructure demonstrates QoS, voice
quality is better (fewer delays, less echo-
field, state whether, when using codec
G729, transmission of data packets for ing, less crackling etc.).
pauses is to be suppressed (activate Yes If, for example, the router does not have
option). QoS, then the voice quality is not as good.
Please see the specialist documentation
Saving settings on the phone for further information.
¤ Click on the Set button to save the set-
tings for the voice quality.

Please note:
You should observe the following for good
voice quality:
– When making calls using VoIP, avoid per-
forming other Internet activities
(e.g. surfing the net).
– Irrespective of the codec used and the net-
work capacity utilisation, please note that
voice delays can occur. Therefore, allow
your VoIP calling partner to finish speaking.
Avoid interrupting your calling partner.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

92
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Assigning sending and ¤ Select the phone numbers for each

handset (fixed network, VoIP) that are
receiving numbers to handsets to be assigned to the handset as receiv-
ing numbers. To do this, click on the
Your phone can be assigned up to seven option behind the phone number in
phone numbers: the fixed network the Receive column. Every handset can
number and up to six VoIP phone num- be assigned several phone numbers or
bers. no phone number (½ = assigned).
You can assign these numbers to the indi- ¤ Now click on Set to save your settings.
vidual handsets that are connected to your
base station as receiving and sending Please note:
numbers. The means that for each hand- – If a VoIP phone number that has been
set, you define the calls that it will ring for, assigned to a handset as a sending number
and which VoIP account (sending is deleted, then the handset will automati-
number) is used by your VoIP provider to cally be assigned the first VoIP phone
number.
calculate outgoing VoIP calls.
– If a phone number is not assigned to any
handset as a receiving number, calls to this
Please note: number will be signalled on all handsets.
A handset is assigned the following numbers – If you have not assigned receiving numbers
after it is registered with the base station: to any of the handsets, calls to all connec-
– Receiving numbers: all phone numbers tions will be signalled on all handsets.
assigned to the phone (fixed network and
VoIP).
– Sending numbers: the fixed network Setting DTMF signalling for VoIP
number and the VoIP phone number that
you entered at the start of the phone con- DTMF signalling is required, for example,
figuration.
for playing and controlling some network
¤ Open the following Web page: mailboxes via key codes (digits).
Settings ¢ Telephony For VoIP specify how key codes are to be
¢ Number Assignment. converted and sent as DTMF signals: as
This will display the names of all registered audible information in the voice channel
handsets, and a list for each handset with or as a "SIP Info" message.
the phone numbers that are configured Ask your VoIP provider which type of
and activated for the phone. The connec- DTMF transmission it supports.
tion names are shown in the Connections ¤ Open the following Web page:
column. The fixed network connection is Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Advanced Set-
always at the end of the list. tings.
¤ Define a VoIP phone number as the In the DTMF over VoIP Connections area,
sending number for each handset. To make the required settings for sending
do this, click on the option behind the DTMF signals. Bear in mind your provider's
phone number in the Send column. The guidelines.
previous assignment will automatically
be deactivated.
¤ Activate Audio or RFC 2833 if DTMF sig-
nals are to be transmitted acoustically
(in voice packages).
Please note:
The fixed network number is permanently ¤ Activate SIP Info if DTMF signals are to
assigned to each handset as a sending be transmitted as code.
¤ Now click on Set to save your settings.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

number. This assignment cannot be deacti-

vated. This guarantees that emergency
numbers can be dialled from every handset.

93
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

If you click on No, the phone will use

Please note:
The settings for DTMF signalling apply to all the ports specified in SIP port and RTP
VoIP connections (VoIP accounts). port.
¤ Now click on Set to save your settings.
Defining local communication
ports for VoIP Defining dialling plans
¤ Open the following Web page: You can define user-specific dialling plans
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Advanced Set-
for your phone.
¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Dialing Plans.
tings.
In the Listen Ports for VoIP Connections area,
specify which local ports the telephone is
to use for VoIP telephony. The ports must Setting Area Code Predialling
not be used by any other subscriber in the In VoIP calls you must generally always
LAN. dial the area code – even for local calls.
SIP port You can save the annoying need to dial the
Specify the local communication port area code for local calls by activating the
that the phone should use to send and Area Code Predialling function. In VoIP calls,
receive signalling data. Specify a the area code entered is then prefixed to
number between 1024 and 49152. all numbers that do not start with 0 – even
The default port number for SIP signal- when dialling numbers from the directory
ling is 5060. and other lists.
RTP port
Specify the local communication port
¤ Enter your area code in the Area Code
field, e.g. 089.
that the phone should use to send and
receive voice data. Enter an even ¤ Click on the Yes option next to Predial
number between 1024 and 49152. The area code for local calls through VoIP to
port number must not be the same as activate the function.
the port number in the SIP port field. If you click on No you must enter the
If you enter an odd number, the even area code even for local calls via VoIP.
number just below it will be set Numbers in the directory must always
(e.g. if you enter 5003, 5002 is set). contain the area code for dialling via
The default port number for voice VoIP.
transmission is 5004. ¤ Click on Set to save the settings.
Use random ports
Please note that if the option is activated, the
Click on the Yes option if you do not area code is prefixed to all phone numbers that
want the phone to use fixed ports for do not start with 0 and are dialled via VoIP. This
SIP port and RTP port, but rather to use is especially the case for numbers of the net-
any free ports. work answer machine (page 71) and, if the
The use of random ports makes sense if Emergency calls always via fixed line option is
deactivated (see below), for emergency num-
you want several phones to be oper- bers.
ated on the same router with NAT. The
phones must then use different ports
so that the router's NAT is only able to
forward incoming calls and voice data
Version 4, 16.09.2005

to one (the intended) phone.

94
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Changing settings for dialling Loading/deleting directories

emergency numbers
into/from the PC
You can store up to five emergency num-
bers in your telephone. The default setting The Web configurator has the following
for the phone is that these emergency options for editing the directories of the
numbers are always dialled via the fixed registered handbooks.
network – irrespective of which connec- u Store the handset directories on a PC.
tion type you select. The fixed network They will be stored in tsv-ASCII files (tsv
supports general emergency numbers = tabulator separated values). These
(e.g. establishing a connection to the files can be edited with an ASCII editor
local police emergency number). (e.g. Notepad/Editor in Windows acces-
You can deactivate the setting for emer- sories) and loaded onto every handset
gency numbers to always be dialled via that is registered. You can also transfer
the fixed network. directory entries from the tsv file into
your Outlook™ address book.
Emergency numbers may have been pre-
set in your phone. They are displayed on u Transfer Outlook™ contacts to the
the Dialing Plans Web page. You can handset directories. Export Outlook™
change the emergency phone numbers. contacts into a tsv-ASCII file and trans-
fer this into the directories. Find out
Warning: how to do this in the section "Format of
– If you deactivate the Emergency calls always the directory file (tsv file)" on page 96.
via fixed line option, make sure that your u Delete the directory on the handset. If
VoIP provider supports emergency num- you have edited the directory file (tsv
bers, such as the local police emergency
number.
file) on the PC and would like to use this
– Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if modified directory on the handset, you
the key lock is activated. Before dialling, can delete the current directory from
press and hold the hash key #, to the handset first. Tip: Back up the cur-
release the key lock. rent directory on your PC before delet-
ing it. You can then load it back onto
The preconfigured emergency numbers the handset if the modified directory is
are displayed in the Emergency Numbers affected by formatting errors and
area. some, or all, of it cannot be loaded onto
¤ Enter the emergency numbers in the the handset.
empty fields and edit emergency num- Preconditions:
bers that have already been entered.
u The handset can send and receive
¤ If you click on No next to Emergency calls directory entries.
always via fixed line, the emergency
u The directory on the handset is not
numbers are dialled via the type of con-
being accessed, i.e. the directory is not
nection you specify when dialling (by
pressing the talk key c briefly or
open.
pressing and holding). ¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Telephone
If you click on the Yes option, your
Directory.
phone will always dial emergency num-
bers via the fixed network (fixed line) ¤ In the Handset area, select the handset
(default setting). whose directory you want to edit. To do
¤ Click on Set to save the settings. this, click on the option before the
Version 4, 16.09.2005

handset.

95
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Load the directory file from the PC to Format of the directory file (tsv file)
the handset
The following describes the structure of
¤ In the File for upload field: enter the tsv the tsv file as it is created from the phone.
file (complete path name) that is to be The phone expects the same structure if
loaded onto the handset. Click on the you load a tsv file from the PC onto a hand-
Browse button to navigate to the file. set. A tsv file created by Outlook™ may
¤ Click on the Upload button to start the need editing with an ASCII editor before it
transfer. can be loaded onto a handset.
The display will show how many of the Every directory entry in the tsv file is
entries from the tsv file are being trans- recorded in one line (which is closed with
ferred to the directory. If a formatting an end-of-line symbol).
error occurs, the line number for the The data in each entry has a specific posi-
affected entry will be specified. tion within the line. The positions are sep-
arated by tabs (<tab>). The following data
Transfer rules is written in the file in the specified order:
The directory entries from a tsv file that 1. Internal code (can remain empty)
are loaded onto the handset will be added
2. Name
to the directory. No directory entries will
be overwritten or deleted. 3. Number
If the phone number for a directory entry 4. Anniversary date (DD.MM.) and the
is identical to the phone number for an time of the reminder call (HH:MM) sep-
entry in the tsv file, the entry is not copied arated by a space
to the handset. 5. Number of the melody that has been
set for the reminder call on the anniver-
Loading the directory from the sary (number between 0 and 9;
handset to the PC 0 = optical signalling)
6. Status of the reminder call (1=on)
¤ In the Handset Directory area click on the 7. Number of the VIP melody
Download button. A Windows dialogue
(number between 0 and 9)
will be shown to save the file.
¤ Enter the directory on the PC (complete
8. SMS mailbox address (number be-
tween 0 and 9)
path name) in which the directory file is
to be stored. Click on the Save button or If one of the above parameters in a direc-
OK. tory entry is not set, then the relevant
position must remain empty
Deleting the directory (<tab><tab>).

¤ In the Handset Directory area, click on Example:

the Delete button. You want to create an entry for Anna Sand
¤ Confirm the prompt Telephone directory with the number 123456. Anna Sand
of the selected handset will be deleted. Con- should be entered as a VIP (no anniver-
tinue? with OK. sary).
All directory entries will be deleted, inclu- The tsv file must contain the following in a
ding the entries for the online directories. line:
<tab>Anna Sand<tab>123456<tab><tab>
Please note: <tab><tab>5<tab><enter>
Version 4, 16.09.2005

For how to delete the directory on the handset,

see page 35

96
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Saving messenger access data ¤ In the Messenger Account field, select

whether you wish to use the Gigaset.net
The messenger client in your base station Jabber server or another provider's
enables instant messaging (immediate messenger server (Other).
message transfer, chatting). The phone The access data for Gigaset.net are
supports the XMPP messenger (Jabber). already stored in the base station. They
In order for you to use your phone's mes- are displayed in Jabber ID, Authentication
senger to "go online" and "chat" on the password and Jabber server. With this
Internet, the access data of a messenger data you can also register with the
server must be saved on your phone. Gigaset.net Jabber server through your
PC.
Your phone is already registered with the
Gigaset.net Jabber server. An account has ¤ Enter the user ID (max. 50 characters)
already been assigned to the phone. You and password (max. 20 characters) that
can chat to other Gigaset.net subscribers you used to register with the messen-
via this account. You must also create a ger server in the Jabber ID and Authenti-
buddy list on your PC (see "Setting up a cation password fields. If you have
Gigaset.net Jabber-Account" on page 98). selected Messenger Account = Gigaset.net,
the fields are preconfigured with your
You can also register with another instant Gigaset.net account.
messaging provider that supports XMPP
Messenger (Jabber). You must then save
¤ In the Jabber server field, enter the IP
address or the DNS name of the mes-
the messenger server address and your
senger server with which you are regis-
access data on your phone.
tered for instant messaging.
You can define a Resource name and a
Max. 74 alphanumeric characters.
Priority for your phone. Both are required if
you are logged in (online) with the mes- If you have selected Messenger Account =
senger server with several devices (phone, Gigaset.net, the field is preconfigured
desktop PC and notebook) at the same with the name of the Gigaset.net
time using the same Jabber ID. server.
The Resource name is used to distinguish
¤ Enter the number of the communica-
tion port on the Jabber server in the
between these devices. The phone cannot
Jabber server port field. The default port
log in with the messenger server if it does
is 5222.
not have a resource name.
If you have selected Messenger Account =
You should assign a Priority, as each mes-
Gigaset.net, the port number is precon-
sage will only be sent to one device for
figured.
each Jabber ID. The Priority determines
which of the devices receives the mes- ¤ Enter a resource name (max. 20 char-
sage. acters) in the Resource field.
The default is: phone.
Example: You are online using one of your
phone's handsets and your PC both at the ¤ Enter the priority for your phone in the
same time. You have assigned your phone field Priority. Select a number between
(Resource-name "phone") the Priority 5 and 128 (highest priority) and 127 (lowest
your PC (resource name "PC") the priority priority) for the priority.
10. In this case, any message addressed to The default is: 5
your Jabber ID will be sent to your phone. ¤ Click on the Set button.
¤ Open the following Web page:
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ Messenger.

97
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Setting up a Gigaset.net Jabber-Account If the subscriber answers this request pos-

Your phone is already registered with the itively, he is added to your buddy list. The
Gigaset.net Jabber server. An account has updated buddy list will be displayed on
already been assigned to the phone. your handset the next time you restart
Messenger. To restart: If necessary, close
In order to chat with other Gigaset.net your connection to the messenger server
subscribers via this account, you must (page 54) and then go back online
transfer the required Gigaset.net subscrib- (page 53).
ers to a contact list (buddy list) on your PC.
You can use any conventional Jabber cli- Please note:
ent to do this (e.g. PSI, Miranda; see also For how to use your handset to go online and
e.g. http://www.swissjabber.ch). chat with or call buddies, see page 52.
In order to use the Gigaset.net Jabber
account, proceed as follows: Making e-mail settings
¤ Start the Web configurator, open the
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ Messenger You can use your phone to be notified
Web page and select the Messenger about new e-mail messages on your
Account Gigaset.net field. Your account incoming e-mail server (page 49).
data is displayed in Jabber ID and You must store the address/DNS name of
Authentication password. You need this your incoming e-mail server and your per-
to create a buddy list via the Jabber cli- sonal access data in the phone and acti-
ent on your PC. vate the e-mail request on your incoming
¤ Start the Jabber client on your PC. e-mail server, so that it can connect to the
¤ Enter your Gigaset.net Jabber ID in the incoming e-mail server and your mailbox.
Jabber client. The Jabber ID is composed As soon as the data is stored in the phone,
of your Gigaset.net number and it will periodically (approx every 15 min-
"@jabber.gigaset.net" utes) connect to the incoming e-mail
Example: server and check if any new messages
21721123901#[email protected] have been received.
¤ Now enter your Authentication password. ¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ E-Mail.
Please note:
– Do not select the "Create new account"
¤ Enter the user name (account name)
agreed with the Internet provider
option. Your Gigaset.net Jabber account
has already been created in Gigaset.net. (max. 50 characters) in the field
– The "SSL connection" option must be deac- Authentication Name.
tivated in the Jabber client. ¤ Enter the password that you agreed
with your provider for accessing the
¤ Now you can enter Gigaset.net sub- incoming e-mail server (max. 20 char-
scribers as contacts (buddies). acters; case sensitive) in the field
For the Jabber ID of each subscriber, Authentication password.
enter the subscriber's Gigaset.net ¤ Enter the name of the incoming e-mail
number with "@jabber.gigaset.net" server (POP3 server) (max. 74 charac-
(example: 2141524901#9@jab- ters) in the field POP3 Server. Example:
ber.gigaset.net). pop.theserver.com.
A request to "Add to contact list" is sent to
Version 4, 16.09.2005

the subscriber.

98
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

¤ From the Check for new E-Mail list, select Please note:
the time interval at which your phone
– When updating from the Internet, checks
is to check whether new e-mail mes- are made to ensure that no newer version
sages have been received on the of the firmware exists. If this is not the case,
incoming e-mail server. Select Never to the operation is terminated.
deactivate the check. Select one of the – You should not change the URL for the
other values to activate the check for Internet server because this address is also
new e-mails. used to load provider information from the
Internet. If you have entered another URL,
Only activate the check if a messaging- you can re-activate the default URL by
capable handset (e.g. Gigaset S45) is restoring the base station default settings
registered to your base station. (page 64).
¤ Click on the Set button to save the set-
tings in your phone. Conducting the firmware update
locally
Please note:
For how to show the messages from your mail- Precondition: A Web server is running on
box on your handset, see page 50 the local PC (e.g. Apache).
¤ First, load the desired version of the
Defining the server for firmware firmware from the Internet onto a local
PC.
updates, starting the update ¤ In the User defined firmware file field
If necessary, you can load updates of the enter the IP address of the PC in your
base station firmware onto your phone. local network and the complete path
You can either download the updates and name of the firmware file on the
directly from the Internet or from a PC in PC. Example: 192.168.2.105/S450IP/
your local network. Firmware_Datei.bin.
Using the Web configurator you can spec-
¤ Click on Set to save the changes.
ify from where the firmware should be This setting is automatically used for the
loaded. subsequent firmware update. The Inter-
net server URL stays saved and is re-used
¤ Open the following Web page: for further firmware updates. If you want
Settings ¢ Miscellaneous. to use a local PC again for another update,
then you have to re-enter the IP address
Download the firmware update directly and file name.
from the Internet
Please note:
The server on which Siemens makes new If an error arises during a firmware update
firmware versions available for your base from a local PC, the most recent version of the
station is set by default. The URL of the firmware is automatically downloaded from
Internet server is displayed in the Data the Internet.
server field.
The firmware is loaded from the Internet
if you do not enter a local file in the
User defined firmware file field before this
update.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

99
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Starting firmware update problems. These messages give you infor-

mation on the status of a connection and
Preconditions: contain a provider-specific code that helps
u No calls are being made via the fixed the service team when they are analysing
network or VoIP. the problem.
u There is no internal connection ¤ Open the following Web page:
between the registered handsets. Settings ¢ Miscellaneous.
u The base station menu is not open in ¤ Click on the Yes option after Show VoIP
any of the handsets. status on handset to activate status mes-
¤ Click on Update Firmware. sage display
If you click on No, no VoIP status mes-
The firmware is updated. This process can sages are displayed.
take up to 3 minutes.
¤ Click on Set to save the changes.
Please note:
You can also start the firmware update on the Please note:
handset (page 66). A table with possible status codes and their
meaning can be found in the Appendix on
page 105.
Activating/deactivating the
automatic version check
When the version check is activated, the
phone checks on a daily basis whether the
Siemens configuration server is carrying a
new version of the phone firmware or of
the file with the general settings for your
VoIP provider.
If a new version is available, a notification
is sent to the handset and the message key
flashes. You can then carry out an auto-
matic update of the firmware (page 66) or
of the VoIP provider settings (page 67).
¤ Open the following Web page:
Settings ¢ Miscellaneous.
¤ Click on the Yes option next to Auto-
matic check for software/profile updates to
activate the automatic version check.
Click on No if you do not want a version
check to be carried out.
¤ Click on Set to save the changes.

Activating VoIP status message

display
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Display VoIP status messages on your

handset when there are VoIP connection

100
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / web_server.fm / 28.3.07

Web configurator

Checking status information via

your phone
General information about your phone is
displayed.
¤ In the menu list, click on the Status
register.
The following information is displayed:

IP Configuration
IP address
The phone's current IP address within
the local network. For assigning the IP
address, see page 82.
MAC address
The phone's device address.

Software
Firmware version
Version of the firmware currently
downloaded. You can download
updates of the firmware on your phone
(page 66). Firmware updates are avail-
able on the Internet.
EEPROM version
Version of your phone's EEPROM stor-
age chip (page 124).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

101
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Appendix Questions and answers

If you have any questions about using
Care your phone, visit us at any time at
www.siemens.com/gigasetcustomercare.
¤ Wipe the base station, charging cradle The table below contains a list of common
and handset with a damp cloth (do not problems and possible solutions.
use solvent) or an antistatic cloth.
Please note:
Never use a dry cloth. This can cause To support the service team, it can be helpful if
static. you have the following information to hand:
– Version of firmware, EEPROM and your
phone's MAC address
Contact with liquid ! You can check this information with the
Web configurator (page 101). For how to
If the handset has come into contact with display the MAC address on your handset,
liquid: turn to page 69.
1. Switch off the handset and remove – VoIP status code (page 105)
the battery pack immediately. For problems with VoIP connections, you
should set VoIP status messages to be dis-
2. Allow the liquid to drain from the hand- played on your handset. (page 68,
set. page 100). These messages contain a sta-
3. Pat all parts dry, then place the handset tus code that helps when the problem is
with the battery compartment open analysed.
and the keypad facing down in a dry,
warm place for at least 72 hours (not The display is blank.
in a microwave, oven etc.). 1. The handset is not switched on.
4. Do not switch on the handset again ¥ Press and hold the end call key a.
until it is completely dry. 2. The battery is flat.
When it has fully dried out, you will nor- ¥ Charge the battery or replace it
mally be able to use it again. (page 7).
The keys of a handset do not respond when
pressed.
The key lock is activated.
¥ Press and hold the hash key #
(page 24).
Base "X" flashes on the display.
1. The handset is outside the range of the
base station.
¥ Move the handset closer to the base
station.
2. The base station is not switched on.
¥ Check the base station's mains adapter
(page 10).
3. An update of the base station firmware is
currently being conducted (page 66/
page 99).
¥
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Please wait until the update is complete.

102
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Base Search flashes in the display. You have made a call via VoIP but cannot
hear the other participant.
The handset is set to Best Base and no base sta-
tion is switched on or within range. Your phone is connected to a router with NAT/
¥ Move the handset closer to the base sta- firewall.
tion. ¥ Your STUN server (page 87) or outbound
¥ Check the base station mains adapter. proxy (page 88) settings are incomplete or
incorrect. Check the settings.
Please register flashes in the display.
¥ No outbound proxy is entered or the out-
The handset is not registered. bound proxy mode Never is activated
¥ Register the handset (page 72). (page 88) and your phone is connected to a
router with symmetric NAT or a blocking
Handset does not ring. firewall.
The ringer tone is switched off. ¥ Port forwarding is activated on your router,
¥ Activate the ringer tone (page 62). but no permanent IP address has been
assigned to your phone.
You cannot hear a ring/dialling tone from
the fixed network. You cannot make calls via VoIP. Server not
accessible! is displayed.
Base station's phone cord has been replaced.
¥ When purchasing a new cord, ensure that it
¥ First wait a few minutes. This is often a
short-term event that corrects itself after a
has the correct pin connections (page 11).
short time.
The other party cannot hear you. If the message is still displayed, proceed as fol-
You have pressed the u (INT) key. The hand- lows:
set is "muted". ¥ Check whether your phone's Ethernet cable
¥ Switch on the microphone again (page 23).
¥
is correctly connected to the router.
Check your router's cable connection to the
When making calls from the fixed network, Internet.
the caller's phone number is not displayed
although CLIP (page 22) is set.
¥ Check whether the phone is connected to
the LAN. Set a ping command, for example,
Phone number identification is not enabled. on the phone (ping s <local IP address of
¥ The caller should ask his network provider the phone>). It may be that no IP address
could be assigned to the phone or a perma-
to enable Calling Line Identification (CLI).
nently set IP address is already assigned to
You hear an error tone when keying an another LAN subscriber. Check the settings
input on the router, you may have to activate the
(a descending tone sequence). DHCP server.
Action has failed/invalid input.
¥ Repeat the operation.
Watch the display and refer to the user
guide if necessary.
You cannot connect to the router and the
phone is assigned a static IP address.
¥ Check on the router whether the IP address
is already being used by another device in
the LAN or belongs to the block of IP
addresses that is reserved on the router for
dynamic address assignment.
¥ If necessary, change the phone's IP address
(page 68).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

103
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

You cannot make calls via VoIP. Either No firmware update or VoIP profile down-
Provider registration failed! or Registration failed is load is carried out.
shown.
¥ First wait a few minutes. This is often a
1. If Currently not possible! is displayed, the VoIP
connections may be busy or a download/
short-term event that corrects itself after a update is already being carried out.
short time.
The message may still be displayed for the fol-
¥ Repeat the process at a later time.
lowing reasons: 2. If File corrupted! is displayed, the firmware or
profile file may be invalid.
1. The personal VoIP access data (Username,
Authent. Name and Authent. Password) you
¥ Please use only firmware and down-
loads that are made available on the
have entered may be incomplete or wrong.
¥
Check your information. In particular,
preconfigured Siemens server
(page 99) or at www.siemens.com/
check your use of upper and lower case.
gigasetcustomercare.
2. The general settings for your VoIP provider 3. If Server not accessible! is displayed, the
are incomplete or incorrect (incorrect download server may not be accessible.
server address).
¥
Start the Web configurator and check
¥ The server is currently not accessible.
Repeat the process at a later time.
the settings.
¥ You have changed the preconfigured
You cannot establish a connection to the server address (page 99). Correct the
phone with your PC's Web browser. address. If necessary, reset the base sta-
¥ When establishing a connection, check the
tion.
phone's local IP address that has been 4. If Transmission Error XXX is displayed, an
entered. You can check the IP address on error has occurred in the transmission of
your handset. the file. An HTTP error code is displayed for
¥ Check the LAN connections for the PC and XXX.
phone. ¥ Repeat the process. If the error occurs
¥ Check that your phone can be reached. Set again, consult the Service department.
a ping command, for example, on the
phone (ping s <local IP address of the
5. If Check IP settings! is displayed, your phone
may not be connected to the Internet.
¥
phone>).
You have tried to reach the phone via a
¥ Check the cable connections between
the phone and router and between the
secure http (https://...). Try again with
router and the Internet.
http://....
¥ Check whether the phone is connected
You cannot be reached for calls from the to the LAN, i.e. it can be reached at its IP
Internet. address.
¥ There is no entry for your phone in your
router's routing table. Check the settings
for the NAT refresh time (page 87).
¥ Your phone is not registered with the VoIP
provider.
¥ You have entered the wrong user ID or an
incorrect domain (page 85).
Version 4, 16.09.2005

104
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

VoIP status codes Status Meaning

code
If you have problems with your VoIP con-
nections, activate the Show Stat. on HS 0x403 The requested service is not sup-
function (page 68, page 100). You will ported by the VoIP provider.
then receive a VoIP status code that will 0x404 Wrong phone number.
support you in problem analysis. Also No subscriber to this number.
enter the code during problem analysis by Example: In a local call you have not
the Service department. dialled the area code although your
VoIP provider does not support local
In the following tables you will find the calls
meanings of the most important status
0x405 Method not permitted.
codes and messages.
0x406 Not acceptable.
Status Meaning The requested service cannot be pro-
code vided.
0x300 The called party can be reached 0x407 Proxy authentication required.
under several phone numbers. If the
VoIP provider supports this, a list of 0x408 The party cannot be reached (e.g.
the phone numbers is transmitted as account has been deleted)
well as the status code. The caller can 0x410 The requested service is not available
select to which number he/she wants from the VoIP provider.
to make the connection.
0x413 Message is too long.
0x301 Permanently redirected.
The called party can no longer be 0x414 URI is too long.
reached under this number. The new 0x415 Query format is not supported.
number is transmitted to the phone
together with the status code, and 0x416 URI is faulty.
the phone then no longer accesses 0x420 Incorrect ending
the old number but dials the new
address immediately. 0x421 Incorrect ending
0x302 Temporarily redirected. 0x423 The requested service is not sup-
The phone is informed that the called ported by the VoIP provider.
party cannot be reached under the 0x480 The dialled number is temporarily
number dialled. The duration of redi- unavailable.
recting is time-limited. The phone is
also informed of the duration of redi- 0x481 The recipient is not available.
recting. 0x482 Double service query
0x305 The query is redirected to another 0x483 Too many "hops":
proxy server, e.g. to balance query
The query was rejected because the
loads. The phone will make the same
service server (proxy) has decided
query once again to another proxy
that this query has already run
server. This is not a redirection of the
through too many service servers.
address per se.
The maximum number was previ-
0x380 Other service: ously specified by the original sender
The query or the call could not be of the query.
made. But the phone is notified what 0x484 Wrong number:
other options there are to be able to
In most cases this response means
connect the call.
that you have simply omitted one or
0x400 Wrong call more digits in the phone number.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

0x401 Not authorised 0x485 The URI dialled is not unique and can
not be processed by the VoIP pro-
vider.

105
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Status Meaning Status Meaning

code code
0x486 The called party is busy. 0x504 Time limit at the gateway
0x487 General faults: 0x505 The server rejects the query because
The call was interrupted before a call the indicated version number of the
was established. The status code con- SIP protocol does not at least concur
firms receipt of the interruption sig- with the version that the server or the
nal. SIP device use that is involved in this
query.
0x488 The server cannot process the query
because the data entered in the 0x515 The server rejects the query because
media description is not compatible. the message exceeds the maximum
permitted size.
0x491 The server notifies that the query will
be processed as soon as a previous 0x600 The called party is busy.
query has been completed.
0x603 The called party has rejected the call.
0x493 The server rejects the query because
0x604 The called URI does not exist.
the phone cannot decrypt the mes-
sage. The sender has used an encryp- 0x606 The communication settings are not
tion method that neither the server acceptable.
nor the receiver phone can decrypt.
0x701 The called party has hung up.
0x500 The proxy or the receiving device has
0x703 Connection interrupted because of
discovered a fault while executing
time-out.
the query, which makes further exe-
cution of the query impossible. In this 0x704 Connection interrupted because of a
case, the caller or the phone displays SIP error
the fault and repeats the query after
a few seconds. The number of sec- 0x705 Wrong dialling tone
onds after which the query can be 0x706 No connection established
repeated may be transmitted to the
caller or phone by the receiving 0x751 Busy tone:
device. No codec match between the calling
and called subscribers.
0x501 The query cannot be processed by
the recipient because the recipient 0x810 General Socket Layer Error: User is
does not have the functionality that not authorised.
the caller requires. If the recipient
0x811 General Socket Layer Error:
understands the query but does not
Wrong Socket Number
process it because the sender does
not have the necessary rights or the 0x812 General Socket Layer Error: Socket is
query is not permitted in the current not connected.
context, a 405 is sent instead of 501.
0x813 General Socket Layer Error:
0x502 In this case, the receiving device that Memory error
transmits this error code is a proxy or
a gateway and has received an invalid 0x814 General Socket Layer Error: Socket
response from its gateway via which not available – check IP settings/con-
this query is to be processed. nection problem/VoIP setting incor-
rect
0x503 The query cannot currently be proc-
essed by the receiving device or the 0x815 General Socket Layer Error:
proxy because the server is either Illegal application on the socket inter-
overloaded or is being serviced. If it is face.
possible for the query to be repeated
Version 4, 16.09.2005

in the foreseeable future, the server

informs the caller or the phone of
this.

106
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Searching for service

information
You may need the service information of
your phone (base station and handset) for
Customer Services.

Base station service information

Precondition: You are conducting an
external call. The connection has been
established for at least 8 sec.
§Options§ ¢ Service Info
Confirm selection with §OK§.
The following information is displayed:
1: Serial number of the base station (RFPI)
2: Serial number of your handset (IPUI)
3: Informs the service employees of the
base station settings (in hex diagram),
e.g. the number of registered handsets,
repeater mode. The last 4 digits indicate
the number of operating hours (hexadeci-
mal).
4: Variant, version of the firmware (digits 3
to 5).
5: Gigaset.net number of your phone.
With this number you can call a service
employee over the Internet without need-
ing to be registered with a VoIP provider.
This means that he/she can test online
connections and VoIP telephony irrespec-
tive of the VoIP provider.

Service information of the handset

In the handset idle status:
Open the menu by pressing v
¤ Press the following keys one after the
other: *#QL#
The following information is displayed via
the handset:
1: Serial number (IPUI)
2: Number of operating hours
3: Variant, version of handset software
Version 4, 16.09.2005

107
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Service (Customer Care)

You can get assistance easily when you have technical questions or questions about how to use your
device by using our online support service on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/gigasetcustomercare
This site can be accessed at any time wherever you are. It will give you 24/7 support for all our prod-
ucts. It also a list of FAQs and answers plus user guides for you to download. You will also find fre-
quently asked questions and answers in the Questions and Answers section of this user guide in the
appendix.
If the device needs to be repaired, please contact one of our Customer Care Centers:

Abu Dhabi. . . . . . . . . . . . .97 12 62 23 800 Malaysia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 77124304

Argentina . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0800-888-9878 Malta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +353 21 4940 632
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1300 665 366 Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01 80 07 11 00 03
Austria . 05 17 07 50 04 (0,065 Euro/Min.) Netherlands
Bahrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 31 73 11 173 . . . . . . . . .0900-3333102 (0,25 Euro/min.)
Belgium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 78 15 66 79 New Zealand . . . . . . . . . . . 08 00 27 43 63
Bosnia Herzegovina . . . . . . . . 033 276 649 Norway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 70 84 00
Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 82 47 09 281
Grande Capitais e Regiões Metropolitanas: Poland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 801 140 160
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4003 3020 Portugal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808781223
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (US$ 0,59) Romania . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 12 04 60 00
Demais localidades: . . . . . 0800 707 1248 Russia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (495) 228 1312
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (US$ 0,59) Serbia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 13 07 00 80
Bulgaria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 873 94 88 Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 27 11 18
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701-355-3984 Slovak Republic
China . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 21 400 670 6007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 59 68 22 66
Croatia . . . . . . . . 016 10 53 81 (0,23 Kun) Slovenija . . . . . 0 14 74 63 36 (6,30 Tolar)
Czech Republic . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 032 727 South Africa. . . . . . . . . . . . 08 60 10 11 57
Denmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 25 86 00 Spain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902 103935
Dubai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 14 39 69 944 Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 87 50 99 11
Egypt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 7623441 Switzerland
Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 23 11 34 25 . . . . . . . . . . 0848 212 000 (0,08 SFr./Min.)
France. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 56 38 42 00 Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 23 96 10 06
Germany .01805 333 222 (0,14 Euro/Min.) Thailand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 722 1118
Greece . . . . . 801 11 11 11 6 (0,026 Euro) Turkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 21 64 59 98 59
Hungary . . . . . . . . . 06 14 71 24 44 (27 Ft) Ukraine . . . . . . . . . . . .+380-44-451-71-72
Ireland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 50 77 72 77 United Arab Emirates . . . . . 0 43 66 03 86
Italy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 15 11 15 United Kingdom . . . . . . . 0 84 53 67 08 12
Kuwait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 52 44 4200 USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-866 247-8758
Latvia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 50 11 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (toll free)
Luxembourg . . . . . . . . . . . 40 66 61 56 40

Please address any questions about DSL

access and VoIP access to the respective
service provider.

Please have your record of purchase ready when calling.

Replacement or repair services are not offered in countries where our product is not sold by
authorised dealers.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

108
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Authorisation Specifications
This device is intended for analogue
phone lines in your network. Recommended batteries
Voice over IP telephony is possible with an (Valid at the time of going to press)
additional modem via the LAN interface. Nickel-metal-hydride (NiMH):
Country-specific requirements have been u Sanyo Twicell 650
taken into consideration. u Sanyo Twicell 700
We, Siemens Home and Office u Panasonic 700 mAh "for DECT"
Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG, u GP 700mAh
declare that this device meets the u Yuasa Technology AAA Phone 700
essential requirements and other relevant
regulations laid down in Directive 1999/5/ u VARTA Phone Power AAA 700mAh
EC. u GP 850mAh
A copy of the 1999/5/EC Declaration of u Sanyo NiMH 800
Conformity is available at this Internet u Yuasa Technology AAA 800
address: The handset is supplied with two recom-
http://www.siemens.com/gigasetdocs. mended batteries.

Handset operating times/charging

times
The following information relates to bat-
teries with a capacity of 650 mAh.

Standby time around 170 hours (7 days)

Talktime around 13 hours
Charging time around 6 hours

The operating and charging times apply

only when using the recommended bat-
teries.

Please note:
When the display backlight is switched on, the
standby time of the handset is reduced to
around 30 hours.

Base station power consumption

Depending on current status, around
2.5 W.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

109
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

General specifications Symbols

Interfaces Fixed network, Ethernet This section explains the meaning of cer-
No. of channels 60 duplex channels tain symbols and typographical conven-
tions that are used in this user guide.
Radio frequency- 1880–1900 MHz
range Copy Entry / Copy List (example)
Select one of the two specified
Duplex method Time multiplex,
menu functions.
10 ms frame length
~ Enter digits or letters.
Channel grid 1728 kHz
§Save§ The display keys' current func-
Bit rate 1152 kbit/s
tions are shown reverse high-
Modulation GFSK lighted in the bottom display
Language code 32 kbit/s line. Press the display key
below to launch the function.
Transmission 10 mW, average power per
power channel q Press the control key at the top
or bottom: scroll up or down.
Range up to 300 m outdoors,
up to 50 m in buildings r Press the control key on the
Base station 230 V ~/50 Hz right or left: e.g. select set-
power supply ting.
Environmental +5 °C to +45 °C; c / Q / * etc.
conditions in oper- 20% to 75% humidity Press the matching key on the
ation handset.
Dialling mode DTMF (touch tone dialling)
Flash time 250 ms
Codecs G711, G726, G729AB with
VAD/CNG
Quality of Service TOS, DiffServ
Protocols DECT, GAP, SIP, RTP, DHCP,
NAT Traversal (STUN),
HTTP
Version 4, 16.09.2005

110
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Example of a menu input

a Press and hold (idle status).
¤ Press and hold the end call key until the
The steps you need to perform are shown
in abbreviated form in the user guide. This
is illustrated below using the example of handset returns to idle status.
"Setting the contrast for the display". The
things you have to do are explained in the
boxes.
Example: multiple line input
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Display In many situations you can change set-
tings or enter data in several lines of a dis-
¤ With the handset in idle status, press play.
on the right of the control key to open In this user guide symbols are used to
the main menu. guide you step by step through multiple
¤ Use the control key to select the line input. This is illustrated below using
Ð Settings line – by pressing the con- the example of "Setting the date and
trol key repeatedly up or down until time". The things you have to do are
the menu function is selected. explained in the boxes.
¤ Press the display key §OK§ to confirm the To change the time, open the input field
selection. with:
The Settings submenu is displayed. v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Date/Time
¤ Press up or down on the control key You will see the following display
repeatedly until the Display menu func- (example):
tion is selected.
¤ Press the display key §OK§ to confirm the
Date/Time
Date:
selection.
[10.06.06]
Time:
11:11
Contrast Select and press §OK§. Ý Save
¤ Press the control key at the bottom Date:
until the Contrast menu function is
selected. Enter day, month and year in 6-digit
¤ Press the display key §OK§ to confirm the
format.
selection. The second line is marked with [ ] to
show it is active.
¤ Enter the date using the digit keys.
r Select contrast.
¤ Press on the right or left of the control Time:
key to set the contrast. Enter hours/minutes in 4-digits format.
¤ Press the s key.
§Save§ Press the display key. The fourth line is marked with [ ] to show
¤ Press the display key §Save§ to save the it is active.
setting. ¤ Enter the date using the digit keys.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

111
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

¤ Save the changes. Writing a text/name (without predictive

text)
¤ Press the display key §Save§.
Press and hold the hash key # to switch
¤ Then press and hold the a key. from "Abc" mode to "123" and from "123"
The handset switches to idle status. to "abc" and from "abc" to "Abc" (upper
case: 1st letter upper case, all others lower
case). Press the hash key # before
Writing and editing text entering the letter.
The following rules apply when writing a The following applies when writing an
text: SMS/Messenger message:
u Control the cursor with u v t u The display shows whether upper case,
s. lower case or digits is selected. "Abc",
u Characters are inserted on the left of "abc" or "123" appears at the top right
the cursor. of the display.
u Press the star key * to show the u When you press and hold a key, the
table of special characters. characters of the corresponding key are
displayed in the bottom display line
u The first letter of the name of directory
and marked one after another. When
entries is automatically capitalised, fol-
you release the key, the highlighted
lowed by lower case letters.
character is inserted into the input
field.
Entering special characters
¤ Press the star key *. Writing SMS (with predictive text)
A table is opened containing all the EATONI predictive text helps you when
special characters. The cursor is on the you are writing SMS messages.
character " . " (full stop).
Each key between Q and O is
s _ ! ? @ , ’ " ¤ assigned several letters and characters
( ) ; : §.§ - + & % (see special characters, page 112). These
appear in a selection line immediately
* = < > / â £ $ ¥
under the text panel (over the display
[ ] § Â \ ~ ^ ¿ ¡ keys) as soon as you press a key. The letter
{ } # | you are most likely looking for is shown in
¤ Navigate to the required character with reversed highlights and is at the begin-
the control key r, q. Example: To
ning of the selection line. It is copied into
select @, press v four times and t
the text panel.
twice.
¤ Press the display key §Insert§. The charac-
ter is inserted into the text.
Pressing ” again closes the table
without inserting a character
Version 4, 16.09.2005

112
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Setting input language

Ç
1 ¤ You are writing an SMS (page 40) or a
1(1) Abc 2 Messenger message (page 57).
Hello Peter, I cannot come
today. Wh 3 §Options§ Press the display key.
4 Select Language
Select and press §OK§.
hgi
s Select input language and
X Options
press §OK§.
a Press the end call key briefly
1 EATONI is activated twice to return to the text
2 Upper/lower case or digits
panel.
3 SMS text
4 Selection line The input language setting only applies to
If this letter is the one you want, confirm it the current SMS.
by pressing the next key. If it does not
match the one you want, press the hash Order of directory entries
key # briefly until the letter you are
looking for is reverse highlighted in the The directory entries are usually sorted in
display line and then transferred to the alphabetical order. Spaces and digits take
text field. first priority. The sort order is as follows:
If you press and hold the hash key #
1. Space
you switch from "Abc" mode to "123" and 2. Digits (0–9)
from "123" to "abc" and from "abc" to 3. Letters (alphabetical)
"Abc". 4. Other characters
Activating/deactivating predictive text To get round the alphabetical order of the
¤ You are writing an SMS (page 40) or a entries, insert a space or a digit in front of
the name. These entries will then move to
Messenger message (page 57).
the beginning of the directory. Names that
§Options§ Press the display key. you have prefixed with a star will move to
Predictive Text the end of the directory.
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).
a Press the end call key briefly
to return to the text field.
Enter the text.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

113
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

Gigaset S450 IP – free software If it is not already supplied with the prod-
uct, you can request the source text,
Your Gigaset S450 IP's firmware includes including copyright notices, from Sie-
free software that is licensed under the mens. There is a charge to cover the cost
GNU Lesser General Public License. This of copying and postage. Please submit this
free software was developed by a third request by e-mail or fax to the following
party and is protected by copyright. You address or fax number within 3 years of
will find the licence text in its original Eng- purchasing this product. Please state the
lish version on the pages that follow. exact device type plus the version number
of the installed device software.
The software is provided free of charge.
You are authorised to use this free soft- Small Parts Dispatch Com Bocholt
ware in accordance with the above-men-
tioned licence conditions. In the event of E-mail: [email protected]
contradictions between these licence con- Fax: 02871 / 91 30 29
ditions and the licence conditions that
apply for the software according to Sie- Use of the free software contained in this
mens Home and Office Communication product extending beyond the program
Devices GmbH & Co. KG, the above-men- sequence intended by Siemens is at the
tioned licence conditions shall take prece- user's own risk – i.e. there shall be no
dence for the free software. claims for liability for defects against Sie-
mens Home and Office Communication
The GNU Lesser General Public License
Devices GmbH & Co. KG. The GNU Lesser
(LGPL) is supplied with this product. You
General Public License contains notes
can also download the licence conditions
regarding the author's liability for defects
from the Internet:
or that of other proprietors of the free
u The LGPL is available on the Internet at: software.
http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/ You shall have no right to assert a claim
lesser.html against Siemens Home and Office Com-
u The source text, including copyright munication Devices GmbH & Co. KG based
notices for free software, is currently on liability for defects, if a defect in the
available on the Internet at: product is or could be due to changes you
http://www.siemens.com/developer/ have made to the programs or their con-
c455ip figuration. Furthermore, you shall have no
For more information and Internet links to right to assert a claim against Siemens
the source text of the free software, see Home and Office Communication Devices
the Online Support pages on the Internet GmbH & Co. KG based on liability for
at: defects if the free software violates the
copyright of third parties.
www.siemens.com/gigasetcustomercare
Siemens shall not provide technical sup-
port for the software, including the free
software included within it, if it has been
changed.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

114
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC We protect your rights with a two-step method:
(1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer
LICENSE you this license, which gives you legal permis-
Version 2.1, February 1999 sion to copy, distribute and/or modify the
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foun- library.
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos- To protect each distributor, we want to make it
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA very clear that there is no warranty for the free
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute library. Also, if the library is modified by some-
verbatim copies of this license document, but one else and passed on, the recipients should
changing it is not allowed. know that what they have is not the original
[This is the first released version of the Lesser version, so that the original author's reputation
GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU will not be affected by problems that might be
Library Public License, version 2, hence the ver- introduced by others.
sion number 2.1.] Finally, software patents pose a constant threat
to the existence of any free program. We wish
Preamble to make sure that a company cannot effectively
The licenses for most software are designed to restrict the users of a free program by obtaining
take away your freedom to share and change it. a restrictive license from a patent holder. There-
By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses fore, we insist that any patent license obtained
are intended to guarantee your freedom to for a version of the library must be consistent
share and change free software--to make sure with the full freedom of use specified in this
the software is free for all its users. license.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
applies to some specially designated software covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Soft- License. This license, the GNU Lesser General
ware Foundation and other authors who decide Public License, applies to certain designated
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you libraries, and is quite different from the ordi-
first think carefully about whether this license nary General Public License. We use this license
or the ordinary General Public License is the for certain libraries in order to permit linking
better strategy to use in any particular case, those libraries into non-free programs.
based on the explanations below.
When a program is linked with a library, whe-
When we speak of free software, we are refer- ther statically or using a shared library, the
ring to freedom of use, not price. Our General combination of the two is legally speaking a
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that combined work, a derivative of the original
you have the freedom to distribute copies of library. The ordinary General Public License
free software (and charge for this service if you therefore permits such linking only if the entire
wish); that you receive source code or can get it combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Les-
if you want it; that you can change the software ser General Public License permits more lax cri-
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and teria for linking other code with the library.
that you are informed that you can do these
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
things.
License because it does Less to protect the
To protect your rights, we need to make restric- user's freedom than the ordinary General Public
tions that forbid distributors to deny you these License. It also provides other free software
rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. developers Less of an advantage over compe-
These restrictions translate to certain responsi- ting non-free programs. These disadvantages
bilities for you if you distribute copies of the are the reason we use the ordinary General
library or if you modify it. Public License for many libraries. However, the
For example, if you distribute copies of the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must special circumstances.
give the recipients all the rights that we gave For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive special need to encourage the widest possible
or can get the source code. If you link other use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-
code with the library, you must provide com- facto standard. To achieve this, non-free pro-
plete object files to the recipients, so that they grams must be allowed to use the library. A
Version 4, 16.09.2005

can relink them with the library after making more frequent case is that a free library does
changes to the library and recompiling it. And the same job as widely used non-free libraries.
you must show them these terms so they know In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the
their rights.

115
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

free library to free software only, so we use the Activities other than copying, distribution and
Lesser General Public License. modification are not covered by this License;
In other cases, permission to use a particular they are outside its scope. The act of running a
library in non-free programs enables a greater program using the Library is not restricted, and
number of people to use a large body of free output from such a program is covered only if
software. For example, permission to use the its contents constitute a work based on the
GNU C Library in non-free programs enables Library (independent of the use of the Library in
many more people to use the whole GNU ope- a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
rating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/ depends on what the Library does and what the
Linux operating system. program that uses the Library does.
Although the Lesser General Public License is 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies
Less protective of the users' freedom, it does of the Library's complete source code as you
ensure that the user of a program that is linked receive it, in any medium, provided that you
with the Library has the freedom and the whe- conspicuously and appropriately publish on
rewithal to run that program using a modified each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
version of the Library. disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
The precise terms and conditions for copying, notices that refer to this License and to the
distribution and modification follow. Pay close absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
attention to the difference between a "work of this License along with the Library.
based on the library" and a "work that uses the You may charge a fee for the physical act of
library". The former contains code derived from transferring a copy, and you may at your option
the library, whereas the latter must be combi- offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
ned with the library in order to run. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the
Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE based on the Library, and copy and distribute
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DIS- such modifications or work under the terms of
TRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all
0. This License Agreement applies to any soft- of these conditions:
ware library or other program which contains a a) The modified work must itself be a software
notice placed by the copyright holder or other library.
authorized party saying it may be distributed b) You must cause the files modified to carry
under the terms of this Lesser General Public prominent notices stating that you changed the
License (also called "this License"). Each licen- files and the date of any change.
see is addressed as "you". c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
A "library" means a collection of software func- licensed at no charge to all third parties under
tions and/or data prepared so as to be conveni- the terms of this License.
ently linked with application programs (which d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
use some of those functions and data) to form function or a table of data to be supplied by an
executables. application program that uses the facility, other
The "Library", below, refers to any such soft- than as an argument passed when the facility is
ware library or work which has been distributed invoked, then you must make a good faith
under these terms. A "work based on the effort to ensure that, in the event an applica-
Library" means either the Library or any deriva- tion does not supply such function or table, the
tive work under copyright law: that is to say, a facility still operates, and performs whatever
work containing the Library or a portion of it, part of its purpose remains meaningful.
either verbatim or with modifications and/or (For example, a function in a library to compute
translated straightforwardly into another lan- square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-
guage. (Hereinafter, translation is included wit- defined independent of the application. There-
hout limitation in the term "modification".) fore, Subsection 2d requires that any applica-
"Source code" for a work means the preferred tion-supplied function or table used by this
form of the work for making modifications to it. function must be optional: if the application
For a library, complete source code means all does not supply it, the square root function
the source code for all modules it contains, plus must still compute square roots.)
any associated interface definition files, plus These requirements apply to the modified work
Version 4, 16.09.2005

the scripts used to control compilation and as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
installation of the library. are not derived from the Library, and can be
reasonably considered independent and sepa-

116
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

rate works in themselves, then this License, and 5. A program that contains no derivative of any
its terms, do not apply to those sections when portion of the Library, but is designed to work
you distribute them as separate works. But with the Library by being compiled or linked
when you distribute the same sections as part with it, is called a "work that uses the Library".
of a whole which is a work based on the Library, Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative
the distribution of the whole must be on the work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
terms of this License, whose permissions for the scope of this License.
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and However, linking a "work that uses the Library"
thus to each and every part regardless of who with the Library creates an executable that is a
wrote it. derivative of the Library (because it contains
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim portions of the Library), rather than a "work
rights or contest your rights to work written that uses the library". The executable is there-
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise fore covered by this License.
the right to control the distribution of derivative Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
or collective works based on the Library. executables.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work When a "work that uses the Library" uses mate-
not based on the Library with the Library (or rial from a header file that is part of the Library,
with a work based on the Library) on a volume the object code for the work may be a derivative
of a storage or distribution medium does not work of the Library even though the source
bring the other work under the scope of this code is not.
License. Whether this is true is especially significant if
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordi- the work can be linked without the Library, or if
nary GNU General Public License instead of this the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do to be true is not precisely defined by law.
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to If such an object file uses only numerical para-
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary meters, data structure layouts and accessors,
GNU General Public License, version 2, instead and small macros and small inline functions
of to this License. (If a newer version than ver- (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
sion 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether
License has appeared, then you can specify that it is legally a derivative work. (Executables con-
version instead if you wish.) Do not make any taining this object code plus portions of the
other change in these notices. Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU Library, you may distribute the object code for
General Public License applies to all subsequent the work under the terms of Section 6.
copies and derivative works made from that Any executables containing that work also fall
copy. under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
This option is useful when you wish to copy part directly with the Library itself.
of the code of the Library into a program that is 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you
not a library. may also combine or link a "work that uses the
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a Library" with the Library to produce a work con-
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in taining portions of the Library, and distribute
object code or executable form under the terms that work under terms of your choice, provided
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you that the terms permit modification of the work
accompany it with the complete corresponding for the customer's own use and reverse engi-
machine-readable source code, which must be neering for debugging such modifications.
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 You must give prominent notice with each copy
above on a medium customarily used for soft- of the work that the Library is used in it and that
ware interchange. the Library and its use are covered by this
If distribution of object code is made by offering License. You must supply a copy of this License.
access to copy from a designated place, then If the work during execution displays copyright
offering equivalent access to copy the source notices, you must include the copyright notice
code from the same place satisfies the require- for the Library among them, as well as a refe-
ment to distribute the source code, even rence directing the user to the copy of this
Version 4, 16.09.2005

though third parties are not compelled to copy License. Also, you must do one of these things:
the source along with the object code. a) Accompany the work with the complete cor-
responding machine-readable source code for

117
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

the Library including whatever changes were distribution of the work based on the Library
used in the work (which must be distributed and of the other library facilities is otherwise
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work permitted, and provided that you do these two
is an executable linked with the Library, with things:
the complete machine-readable "work that uses a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
the Library", as object code and/or source code, of the same work based on the Library, uncom-
so that the user can modify the Library and then bined with any other library facilities. This must
relink to produce a modified executable contai- be distributed under the terms of the Sections
ning the modified Library. (It is understood that above.
the user who changes the contents of definiti- b) Give prominent notice with the combined
ons files in the Library will not necessarily be library of the fact that part of it is a work based
able to recompile the application to use the on the Library, and explaining where to find the
modified definitions.) accompanying uncombined form of the same
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for work.
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the with, or distribute the Library except as
library already present on the user's computer expressly provided under this License. Any
system, rather than copying library functions attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense,
into the executable, and (2) will operate pro- link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
perly with a modified version of the library, if will automatically terminate your rights under
the user installs one, as long as the modified this License. However, parties who have recei-
version is interface-compatible with the version ved copies, or rights, from you under this
that the work was made with. License will not have their licenses terminated
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, so long as such parties remain in full compli-
valid for at least three years, to give the same ance.
user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, 9. You are not required to accept this License,
above, for a charge no more than the cost of since you have not signed it. However, nothing
performing this distribution. else grants you permission to modify or distri-
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering bute the Library or its derivative works. These
access to copy from a designated place, offer actions are prohibited by law if you do not
equivalent access to copy the above specified accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
materials from the same place. distributing the Library (or any work based on
e) Verify that the user has already received a the Library), you indicate your acceptance of
copy of these materials or that you have already this License to do so, and all its terms and con-
sent this user a copy. ditions for copying, distributing or modifying
For an executable, the required form of the the Library or works based on it.
"work that uses the Library" must include any 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or
data and utility programs needed for reprodu- any work based on the Library), the recipient
cing the executable from it. However, as a spe- automatically receives a license from the origi-
cial exception, the materials to be distributed nal licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
need not include anything that is normally dis- modify the Library subject to these terms and
tributed (in either source or binary form) with conditions. You may not impose any further
the major components (compiler, kernel, and restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the
so on) of the operating system on which the rights granted herein.
executable runs, unless that component itself You are not responsible for enforcing compli-
accompanies the executable. ance by third parties with this License.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
the license restrictions of other proprietary allegation of patent infringement or for any
libraries that do not normally accompany the other reason (not limited to patent issues), con-
operating system. Such a contradiction means ditions are imposed on you (whether by court
you cannot use both them and the Library toge- order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict
ther in an executable that you distribute. the conditions of this License, they do not
7. You may place library facilities that are a excuse you from the conditions of this License.
work based on the Library side-by-side in a sin- If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simulta-
Version 4, 16.09.2005

gle library together with other library facilities neously your obligations under this License and
not covered by this License, and distribute such any other pertinent obligations, then as a con-
a combined library, provided that the separate sequence you may not distribute the Library at

118
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

all. For example, if a patent license would not write to the author to ask for permission. For
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library software which is copyrighted by the Free Soft-
by all those who receive copies directly or indi- ware Foundation, write to the Free Software
rectly through you, then the only way you could Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions
satisfy both it and this License would be to for this. Our decision will be guided by the two
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. goals of preserving the free status of all deriva-
If any portion of this section is held invalid or tives of our free software and of promoting the
unenforceable under any particular circum- sharing and reuse of software generally.
stance, the balance of the section is intended to NO WARRANTY
apply, and the section as a whole is intended to 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
apply in other circumstances. CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
It is not the purpose of this section to induce LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-
you to infringe any patents or other property CABLE LAW.
right claims or to contest validity of any such EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
claims; this section has the sole purpose of pro- THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PAR-
tecting the integrity of the free software distri- TIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT
bution system which is implemented by public WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
license practices. Many people have made OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
generous contributions to the wide range of THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABI-
software distributed through that system in LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
reliance on consistent application of that sys- THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PER-
tem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he FORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.
or she is willing to distribute software through SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
any other system and a licensee cannot impose ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVI-
that choice. CING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
This section is intended to make thoroughly 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI-
clear what is believed to be a consequence of CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
the rest of this License. ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRI-
is restricted in certain countries either by BUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the origi- LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
nal copyright holder who places the Library GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
under this License may add an explicit geogra- QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
phical distribution limitation excluding those OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
countries, so that distribution is permitted only BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
in or among countries not thus excluded. In BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUS-
such case, this License incorporates the limita- TAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
tion as if written in the body of this License. OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser Gene- PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
ral Public License from time to time. Such new OF SUCH DAMAGES.
versions will be similar in spirit to the present END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version num-
ber of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following
the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Library does not
specify a license version number, you may
choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the

Library into other free programs whose distri-
bution conditions are incompatible with these,

119
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / appendix.fm / 28.3.07

Appendix

How to Apply These Terms to Your New

Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to
be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that every-
one can redistribute and change. You can do so
by permitting redistribution under these terms
(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordi-
nary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following
notices to the library. It is safest to attach them
to the start of each source file to most effec-
tively convey the exclusion of warranty; and
each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.

<one line to give the library's name and a brief

idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistri-
bute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU Lesser General Public License as publis-
hed by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will
be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; wit-
hout even the implied warranty of MERCHAN-
TABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU

Lesser General Public License along with this
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foun-
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos-
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by
electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work
as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign
a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if neces-
sary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright

interest in the library `Frob' (a library for twea-
king knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon,
President of Vice
Version 4, 16.09.2005

120
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / accessories_SAG.fm / 28.3.07

Accessories

Accessories
Gigaset Handsets
Upgrade your Gigaset to a cordless PABX:
Gigaset Handset S45
u Illuminated colour display (4096 colours)
u Illuminated keypad
u Handsfree talking
u Polyphonic ringer tones
u Directory for around 150 entries
u SMS (Precondition: CLIP must be enabled)
u Headset socket
u Room monitor
www.siemens.com/gigaset

Gigaset Handset C45

u Illuminated colour display (4096 colours)
u Various different screensavers
u Illuminated keypad
u Handsfree talking
u Polyphonic ringer tones
u Directory for around 100 entries
u SMS (Precondition: CLIP must be enabled)
u Alarm clock
u Headset socket
www.siemens.com/gigaset

All accessories and batteries are available from your phone retailer.
Only use original accessories. This will avoid possible health risks and
damage to property, and also ensure that all the relevant regulations are
complied with.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

121
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

Glossary C
Call forwarding
CF
A Automatic forwarding of a call to a dif-
ADSL ferent telephone number. There are
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line three kinds of call forwarding:
Special form of DSL. – CFU, Call Forwarding Unconditional
ALG – CFB, Call Forwarding Busy
Application Layer Gateway
– CFNR, Call Forwarding No Reply
NAT control mechanism of a router.
Many routers with integrated NAT use Call waiting
CW
ALG. ALG lets the data packets in a VoIP
VoIP provider feature. A beep during a
connection pass and adds the public IP
call indicates that another caller is wait-
address of the secure private network.
ing. You can accept or reject the second
The router's ALG should be deactivated call. You can activate/deactivate the
if the VoIP provider offers a STUN server feature.
or an outbound proxy.
Chatting
See also: Firewall, NAT, Outbound
Form of communication on the Inter-
proxy, STUN.
net. During a chat, brief messages are
Authentication exchanged between the communicat-
Restriction of access to a network/serv- ing parties in real time. Chatting in this
ice by use of a password to log in. sense is understood to be a written
Automatic ringback form of communication.
See Ringback when the number is Client
busy. Application that requests a service
from a server.
B
Codec
Block dialling Coder/decoder
Enter the complete phone number, and Codec is a procedure that digitises and
correct it if necessary. Then pick up the compresses analogue voice before it is
receiver or press the handsfree key to sent via the Internet and decodes –
dial the phone number. i.e.translates into analogue voice –
Broadband Internet access digital data when voice packets are
See DSL. received. There are different codecs
Buddy that vary, for instance, according to the
Subscriber with whom you exchange level of compression.
brief messages on the Internet in real Both parties involved in the telephone
time (chatting). connection (caller/sender and recipi-
See also: Instant messaging. ent) must use the same codec. This is
negotiated between the sender and the
recipient when establishing a connec-
tion.
The choice of codec is a compromise
between voice quality, transmission
speed and the necessary bandwidth.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

A high level of compression, for exam-

ple, means that the bandwidth

122
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

required for each voice connection is DMZ (Demilitarised Zone)

low. However, it also means that the DMZ describes a part of a network that
time needed to compress/decompress is outside the firewall.
the data is greater, which increases A DMZ is set up, as it were, between
execution time for data in the network a network you want to protect (e.g. a
and thus impairs voice quality. The time LAN) and a non-secure network
required increases the delay between (e.g. the Internet). A DMZ permits
the sender speaking and the recipient unrestricted access from the Internet to
hearing what has been said. only one or a few network compo-
Consultation call nents, while the other network compo-
You are making a call. With a consulta- nents remain secure behind the fire-
tion call, you interrupt the conversation wall.
briefly to establish a connection to DNS
another participant. If you terminate Domain Name System
the connection to this participant Hierarchical system that permits the
immediately, then this was an enquiry assignment of IP addresses to Domain
call. If you switch to and fro between names that are easier to note. This
the first and second participants, it is assignment has to be managed by a
called Toggling. local DNS server in each (W)LAN. The
local DNS server determines the IP
D
address, if necessary by enquiring of
DHCP superordinate DNS servers and other
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol local DNS servers in the Internet.
Internet protocol which handles the You can specify the IP address of the
automatic assignment of IP addresses primary/secondary DNS server.
to Network subscribers. The protocol
is made available in the network by a See also: DynDNS.
server. A DHCP server can e.g. be a Domain name
router. Name of one (of several) Web server on
The phone contains a DHCP client. A the Internet (e.g. Siemens Home) The
router that contains a DHCP server can domain name is assigned to the rele-
assign the IP addresses for the phone vant IP address by DNS.
automatically from a defined address DSCP
block. This dynamic assignment means Differentiated Service Code Point
that several Network subscribers can See Quality of Service (QoS).
share one IP address, although they use DSL
it alternately and not simultaneously. Digital Subscriber Line
With some routers you can specify that Data transfer technology which allows
the IP address for the phone is never Internet access at e.g. 1.5 Mbps over
changed. conventional phone lines. Require-
Displayed name ments: DSL modem and the appropri-
VoIP provider feature. You can specify ate service offered by the Internet pro-
any name that is to be shown to the vider.
other party call instead of your phone DSLAM
number. Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
The DSLAM is a switch cabinet in an
Version 4, 16.09.2005

exchange at which all subscriber con-

nectors converge.

123
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

DTMF F
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Firewall
Another description for dual tone
You can use a firewall to protect your
multi-frequency dialling (DTMF).
network against unauthorised external
Dynamic IP address access. This involves combining various
A dynamic IP address is assigned to a measures and technologies (hard and/
network component automatically via or software) to control the flow of data
DHCP. The dynamic IP address for a between a private network you wish to
network component can change every protect and an unprotected network
time it registers or at certain time inter- (e.g. the Internet).
vals.
See also: NAT.
See also: Static IP address
Firmware
DynDNS Device software in which basic infor-
Dynamic DNS mation is saved for the functioning of a
Domain names and IP addresses are device. A new version of the firmware
realised via DNS. For Dynamic IP can be loaded into the device's memory
addresses this service is now (firmware update) to correct errors or
enhanced with so-called Dynamic DNS update the device software.
(DynDNS). This permits the use of a
network component with a changing Flat rate
IP address as a Server on the Internet. System of billing for an Internet con-
DynDNS ensures that a service can nection. The Internet provider charges
always be addressed on the Internet a set monthly fee. There are no addi-
under the same Domain name irre- tional charges for the duration of the
spective of the current IP address. connection or number of connections.
Fragmentation
E Data packets that are too big are split
ECT into smaller packets (fragments) before
Explicit Call Transfer they are transferred. They are put
Participant A calls Participant B. He puts together again when they reach the
the connection on hold and calls Partic- recipient (defragmented).
ipant C. Rather than connect everyone Full duplex
in a three-party conference, A now Data transmission mode in which data
transfers Participant B to C and hangs can be sent and received at the same
up. time.
EEPROM
Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
Your phone's storage chip with fixed
data (e.g.user-specific device settings
made at the factory) and automatically
saved data (e.g.c alls list entries).
Ethernet network
Wired LAN.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

124
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

G are now more frequently supported

than in the past.
G.711 a law, G.711 µ law
Standard for a Codec. H
G.711 delivers a very good voice qual- Headset
ity that corresponds to that in the ISDN Combination of microphone and head-
fixed network. As there is little com- phone. A headset makes handsfree
pression, the necessary bandwidth is talking more comfortable. There are
around 64 Kbit/s per voice connection, headsets available which are con-
but the delay caused by coding/decod- nected to the handset by a cable.
ing is only 0.125 ms.
HTTP Proxy
"a law" describes the European stand- Sever via which the Network subscrib-
ard and "µ law" describes the North ers can process their Internet traffic.
American/Japanese equivalent.
Hub
G.726 Uses one Infrastructure network to
Standard for a Codec. connect several Network subscribers.
G.726 delivers a good voice quality. It is All data sent to the hub by one network
inferior to the quality with codec G.711 subscriber is forwarded to all network
but better than with G.729. subscribers.
G.729A/B See also: Gateway, Router.
Standard for a Codec.
The voice quality is rather less with
I
G.729A/B. As a result of the high level IEEE
of compression, the necessary band- Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
width is only around 8 Kbit/s per voice International body that defines stand-
connection, but the delay is around ards in electronics and electrotechnol-
15 ms. ogy, concerned in particular with the
standardisation of LAN technology,
Gateway
transmission protocols, data transfer
Connects two different Networks,
rate and wiring.
e.g. a router as an Internet gateway.
For phone calls from VoIP to the tele- Infrastructure network
phone network, a gateway has to be Network with central structure: all
connected to the IP network and the Network subscribers communicate
telephone network (gateway/VoIP pro- via a central Router.
vider). It forwards calls from VoIP to the Instant messaging
telephone network as required. (German: immediate exchange of messages)
Gateway Provider Service that uses a client program to
See SIP provider. allow chatting in real time, i.e. to send
brief messages to other subscribers on
Global IP Address the Internet.
See IP address.
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communication
Originally, European standard for
mobile networks. GSM can now be
described as a worldwide standard. In
Version 4, 16.09.2005

the USA and Japan national standards

125
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

Internet IP pool range

Global WAN. A series of protocols have Range of IP addresses that the DHCP
been defined for exchanging data, server can use to assign dynamic IP
known by the name TCP/IP. addresses.
Every Network subscribers is identifi- L
able via its IP address. DNS assigns a
Domain name to the IP address. LAN
Local Area Network
Important services on the Internet
Network with a restricted physical
include the World Wide Web (WWW),
range. A LAN can be wireless (WLAN)
e-mail, file transfer and discussion
and/or wired.
forums.
Local IP Address
Internet Service Provider
The local or private IP address is the
Enables access to the Internet for a fee.
address for a network component in
IP (Internet Protocol) the local network (LAN). The network
TCP/IP protocol on the Internet. IP is operator can assign any address he or
responsible for addressing parties in a she wants. Devices that act as a link
Network using IP addresses and from a local network to the Internet
routes data from the sender to the (gateway or router) have a public and a
recipient. IP determines the paths private IP address.
(routing) along which the data packets
See also IP address.
travel.
Local SIP Port
IP address
See SIP port/Local SIP port.
A unique address for a network compo-
nent within a network on the basis of M
the TCP/IP protocols (e.g. LAN, Inter-
MAC address
net). On the Internet, domain names Media Access Control Address
are usually assigned instead of IP Hardware address by means of which
addresses. DNS assigns the corre- each network device (e.g. network
sponding IP address to the domain card, switch, phone) can be uniquely
name. identified worldwide. It is composed of
The IP address has four parts (decimal six parts (hexadecimal numbers), sepa-
numbers between 0 and 255) sepa- rated by a "-" (e.g. 00-90-65-44-00-3A).
rated by full stops (e.g. 230.94.233.2). The MAC address is assigned by the
The IP address is made up of the net- manufacturer and cannot be changed.
work number and the number of the
Mbps
Network subscribers (e.g. phone).
Million bits per second
Depending on the Subnet mask the
Unit of the transmission speed in a
front one, two or three parts make up
network.
the network number and the rest of the
IP address addresses the network com- MRU
ponent. The network number of all the Maximum Receive Unit
components in any one network must Defines the maximum user data vol-
be identical. ume within a data packet.
IP addresses can be assigned automati- MTU
cally with DHCP (dynamic IP addresses) Maximum Transmission Unit
Version 4, 16.09.2005

or manually (static IP addresses). Defines the maximum length of a data

packet that can be carried over the net-
See also: DHCP.
work at a time.

126
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

Music on hold O
Music that is played while you are
Outbound proxy
Consultation call or Toggling. The
Alternative NAT control mechanism to
waiting participant hears music while
STUN and ALG.
on hold.
Outbound proxies are implemented by
N the VoIP provider in Firewall/NAT envi-
NAT ronments as an alternative to SIP proxy
Network Address Translation server. They control data traffic
Method for converting (private) through the firewall.
IP addresses to one or more (public) Outbound proxy and STUN servers
IP addresses. NAT enables the should not be used simultaneously.
IP addresses of Network subscribers See also: STUN and NAT.
(e.g. VoIP telephones) in a LAN to be
concealed behind a shared IP address P
for the Router on the Internet. PIN
VoIP telephones behind a NAT router Personal Identification Number
cannot be reached by VoIP servers (on Protects against unauthorised use.
account of the private IP address). In When the PIN is activated a number
order to "get around" NAT, it is possible combination has to be entered in order
to use (alternatively) ALG in the router, to access a protected area.
STUN in the VoIP telephone, or for the You can protect your base station
VoIP provider to use an Outbound configuration data with a system PIN
proxy. (4-digit number combination).
If an outbound proxy is made available Port
you must allow for this in the VoIP set- Data is exchanged between two appli-
tings for your phone. cations in a Network via a port.
Network Port forwarding
Group of devices. Devices can be con- The Internet gateway (e.g. your router)
nected in either wired or wireless forwards data packets from the Inter-
mode. net that are directed to a certain Port to
Networks can also differ in range and the port concerned. This allows servers
structure: in the LAN to offer services on the
– Range: local networks (LAN) or Internet without you needing a public
wide-area networks (WAN) IP address.
– Structure: Infrastructure network Port number
or ad-hoc network Indicates a specific application of a
Network subscribers Network subscribers. Depending on
Devices and computers that are con- the setting in the LAN, the port
nected to each other in a network, e.g. number is permanently assigned or
servers, PCs and phones. else it is newly assigned with each
access.
The combination of IP address/Port
number uniquely identifies the recipi-
ent or sender of a data packet within a
network.
Version 4, 16.09.2005

127
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

Pre-dialling R
See Block dialling.
RAM
Private IP Address Random Access Memory
See Public IP address. Memory in which you have reading and
Protocol storage rights. Items such as melodies
Describes the agreements for commu- and screen pictures are saved in the
nicating within a Network. It contains RAM after being loaded onto the phone
rules for opening, administering and via the Web configurator.
closing a connection, about data for- Registrar
mats, time frames and possible error The registrar manages the Network
handling. subscribers's current IP addresses.
Proxy/Proxy server When you register with your VoIP pro-
Computer program that controls the vider, your current IP address is saved
exchange of data between Client and on the registrar. This means you can
Server in computer networks. If the also be reached when on the move.
phone sends a query to the VoIP server, Ringback when the call is not answered
the proxy acts as a server towards the = CCNR (Completion of Calls on No
phone and as a client towards the Reply). If a participant does not
server. A proxy is addressed via respond when called, a caller can
IP address/Domain namen and Port. arrange an automatic ringback. As
Public IP address soon as the destination phone has
The public IP address is the address for completed a call and is free again the
a network component on the Internet. caller is rung back. This feature must be
It is assigned by the Internet Service supported by the exchange. The ring-
Provider. Devices that act as a link from back request is automatically cancelled
a local network to the Internet (gate- after about 2 hours (depending on the
way, router) have a public and a local IP VoIP provider).
address. Ringback when the number is busy
See also: IP address, NAT = CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber). If a caller hears the busy
Q tone, he or she can activate the ring-
Quality of Service (QoS) back function. As soon as the connec-
Describes the Quality of Service in com- tion is free the caller is rung back. As
munication networks. Differentiations soon as the caller lifts his receiver the
are made between various Quality of connection is made automatically.
Service classes. ROM
QoS influences the flow of data packets Read Only Memory
on the Internet e.g. by prioritising data A type of memory that can only be
packets, bandwidth reservation and read, as opposed to RAM which can be
packet optimisation. both read and written.
In VoIP networks, QoS influences the Router
voice quality. If the whole infrastruc- Routes data packets within a network
ture (router, network server etc.) has and between different networks via the
QoS, the voice quality is better, i.e. quickest route. Can connect Ethernet
fewer delays, less echoing, less crack- networks and WLAN. Can be a
Version 4, 16.09.2005

ling. Gateway to the Internet.

128
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

Routing SIP provider

Routing is the transmission of data See VoIP provider.
packets to another subscriber in your SIP proxy server
network. On its way to the recipient, IP address of your VoIP provider's gate-
the data packet is sent from one router way server.
to the next until it reaches its destina-
tion. Static IP address
A static IP address is assigned to a net-
If data packets were not forwarded in work component manually during net-
this way, a network like the Internet work configuration. Unlike a Dynamic
would not be possible. Routing con- IP address, a static (fixed) IP address
nects the individual networks to this never changes.
global system.
STUN
A router is a part of this system; it trans- Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT
mits data packets both within a local NAT control mechanism.
network and from one network to the
next. Transmission of data from one STUN is a data protocol for VoIP tele-
network to another is performed on the phones. STUN replaces the private IP
basis of a common protocol. address in the data packets of the VoIP
telephone with the public address of
RTP the secure private network. To control
Realtime Transport Protocol
data transfer, a STUN server is also
Global standard for transferring audio required on the Internet. STUN cannot
and video data. Often used in conjunc- be implemented with symmetric NATs.
tion with UDP. In this case, RTP packets
are embedded in UDP packets. See also: ALG, Firewall, NAT,
Outbound proxy.
RTP port
(Local) Port which is used to send and Subnet
receive voice data packets for VoIP. Segment of a Network.
Subnet mask
S IP address consist of a fixed network
Server number and a variable subscriber
Provides a service to other Network number. The network number is identi-
subscribers (Clients). The term can cal for all Network subscribers. The
indicate a computer/PC or an applica- proportion of the IP address made up of
tion. A server is addressed via the network number is determined in
IP address/Domain name and Port. the subnet mask. For the subnet mask
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) 255.255.255.0, for example, the first
Signalling protocol independent of three parts of the IP address are the net-
voice communication. Used for estab- work number and the last part is the
lishing and ending a call. It is also pos- subscriber number.
sible to define parameters for voice Symmetric NAT
transmission. A symmetric NAT assigns different
SIP address external IP addresses and port numbers
See URI. to the same internal IP addresses and
port numbers – depending on the
SIP port/Local SIP port external target address.
(Local) Port which is used to send and
Version 4, 16.09.2005

receive SIP signalling data for VoIP.

129
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / glossary.fm / 28.3.07

Glossary

T URIs can be entered in the phone as a

number. By dialling a URI you can call
TCP
an Internet subscriber with VoIP equip-
Transmission Control Protocol
ment.
Transport protocol. Session-based
transmission protocol: it sets up, moni- URL
tors and terminates a connection Universal Resource Locator
between sender and recipient for trans- Globally unique address of a Domain
porting data. on the Internet.
TLS A URL is a subtype of URI. URLs identify
Transport Layer Security a resource by its location in the Inter-
Protocol for encrypting data transmis- net. For historical reasons the term is
sions on the Internet. TLS is a superor- often used as a synonym for URI.
dinated Transport protocol. User ID
Toggling See User identification.
Toggling allows you to switch between User identification
two callers or between a conference Name/number combination for access
call and an individual caller without e.g. to your VoIP account.
allowing the waiting caller to listen in.
V
Transmission rate
Speed at which data is transmitted in Voice codec
the WAN or LAN. The transmission rate See Codec.
is measured in data units per unit of VoIP
time (Mbit/s). Voice over Internet Protocol
Transport protocol Telephone calls are no longer placed
Controls data transport between com- and transmitted over the telephone
munication partners (applications). network but over the Internet (or other
IP networks).
See also: UDP, TCP, TLS.
VoIP provider
U A VoIP, SIP or Gateway Provider is an
UDP Internet service provider that provides
User Datagram Protocol a Gateway for Internet telephony. As
Transport protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP is the phone works with the SIP standard,
a non session-based protocol. It does your provider must support the SIP
not establish a fixed connection. The standard.
data packets (datagrams) are sent as The provider routes calls from VoIP to
broadcast. The recipient is solely the telephone network (analogue,
responsible for making sure the data is ISDN and mobile radio) and vice versa.
received. The sender is not notified
about whether it is received. W
URI WAN
Uniform Resource Identifier Wide Area Network
Character string used to identify Wide-area network that is unrestricted
resources (e.g. e-mail recipient, in terms of area (e.g. Internet).
http://siemens.com, files).
On the Internet URIs are used as a uni-
Version 4, 16.09.2005

form identification for resources. URIs

are also described as an SIP address.

130
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

Index B
Base selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Base station
A changing system PIN . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Access protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 checking service information . . . . 107
Access to Web configurator connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
from other networks . . . . . . . . . . 83 connecting with fixed network . . . . 11
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 connecting with mains power
Account name (e-mail) . . . . . . . . . 49, 98 supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Activating connecting with router. . . . . . . . . . 11
advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 operating on PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 109
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 24 restoring to factory settings . . . . . . 64
handsfree talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 setting default connection . . . . . . . 65
muting ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 updating firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Activating Annex B for G729 . . . . . . . . 92 Battery
Activating/deactivating repeater charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 9
Address assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ADSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 recommended batteries . . . . . . . . 109
Alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Alert tone Beep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 62 Beep, see Advisory tones
ALG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Best base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Alternative DNS server Birthday, see Anniversary
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Block dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Answer machine, Broadband Internet access . . . . . . . . 122
see Network mailbox Buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 122
Application Layer Gateway (ALG) . . . 122 calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Area code, dial automatically . . . . . . . 94 checking information . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Assigning sending number status changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Buddy list (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line . . 122 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Attaching the belt clip . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Busy (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Buttons (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . 81
Authorisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 C
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 61 Call
Auto-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 accepting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Automatic area code disconnecting (toggling) . . . . . 31, 33
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 94 ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Automatic versions check . . . . . . . . . 100 external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Available codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Away from computer number/name display . . . . . . . . . . 22
Version 4, 16.09.2005

(messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 rejecting external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

131
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

transferring (connect) . . . . . . . . . . . 75 CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Call back Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
initiating (fixed network) . . . . . . . . 31 CLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Call display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 available codecs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Colour scheme (display) . . . . . . . . . . 59
Call diversion Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
VoIP (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Conference call
Call duration display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Call forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Configuration
VoIP (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . 86 via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Configuring
accepting/rejecting (fixed network) . 31 VoIP connection (handset) . . . . . . . 68
accepting/rejecting (VoIP) . . . . . . . . 33 VoIP connection
activating/deactivating (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . 83
(fixed network) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Configuring the Network mailbox . . . 71
activating/deactivating (VoIP) . . . . . 32 Confirmation tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
internal call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Connecting PC with
Call-by-call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Connecting the charging cradle . . . . . . 8
Call-by-call numbers. . . . . . . . . . . 34, 39 Connecting to the Web configurator . 78
Calling Connection
entering IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 activating (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Internet (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . 14
Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29 name (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . 84
via VoIP/fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connection assistant
Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . 22 starting (getting started) . . . . . . . . 12
Calling Line Identification. . . . . . . . . . 22 Connection name
Calling Line Identification fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Calls list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Connection socket for headset . . . . 1, 16
Cancelling Connection to messenger server . . . . 53
dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Connection type
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26 selecting (display key) . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cancelling call back (fixed network) . . 31 selecting (talk key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cancelling operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Consultation call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Care of the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
CF, see Call forwarding Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Changing internal number . . . . . . . . . 74 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Changing the system PIN . . . . . . . . . . 64 Correcting incorrect entries . . . . . . . . 26
Character set table, see Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Special characters
Charge status display (battery) . . . . . 1, 9 D
Charging time of handset . . . . . . . . . 109 Data packets, fragmentation . . . . . . 124
Chatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 122 Data server for firmware update . . . . 99
with buddies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Deactivating
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Checking EEPROM version . . . . . . . . 101 advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Checking service information . . . . . . 107 auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 24

132
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

handsfree talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 network mailbox message . . . . . . . 72
muting ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Default settings setting the screen picture . . . . . . . . 59
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 wrong language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Defining dialling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 25
Delete directory (Web configurator) . . 96 Displayed name (VoIP). . . . . . . . 85, 123
Delete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Disposal
Deleting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 electrical and electronic devices . . . . 5
Demilitarised Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 DMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
De-registering DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
with Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . 79 DNS server
Deregistering alternative (Web configurator) . . . . 82
handset from base station . . . . . . . . 73 preferred (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Destination number (room monitor) . . 76 preferred (Web configurator) . . . . . 82
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 124 Do not disturb (messenger) . . . . . . . . 54
Dialling Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
cancelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Domain name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Domain Name System . . . . . . . . . . . 123
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Draft message list (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . 41
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DSCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
with speed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Differentiated Service Code Point . . . 123 DSLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Digital Subscriber Line . . . . . . . . . . . 123 DTMF (tone dialling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Digital Subscriber Line DTMF-reminder for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . 93
Access Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Dynamic DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Dynamic Host Configuration
copying number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
editing via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Dynamic IP Address . . . . . . . . . . 82, 124
file format on PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 DynDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
loading from PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 E
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Earpiece mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
order of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Earpiece volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
saving an anniversary . . . . . . . . . . . 36 EATONI (predictive text) . . . . . . . . . 112
saving entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 E-mail
saving numbers from SMS text . . . . 44 account name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 98
selecting entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 entering access data . . . . . . . . 49, 98
sending entry/list to handset . . . . . . 36 incoming e-mail server. . . . . . . 49, 98
store sender's SMS number . . . . . . . 44 messages whilst making a
transferring to/from PC . . . . . . . . . . 95 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
using to enter numbers . . . . . . . . . . 36 notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Display registration name/password . . . 49, 98
backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 settings (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
call duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 settings (Web configurator) . . . . . . 98
caller’s number (CLI/CLIP) . . . . . . . . 22 viewing the message header . . . . . 51
changing display language . . . . . . . 59 viewing the sender's address . . . . . 51
Version 4, 16.09.2005

colour scheme/contrast . . . . . . . . . . 59 E-mail address, SMS to . . . . . . . . . . . 42

in idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 E-mail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

133
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

Emergency number connection name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 external enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . . 31
when keypad lock is active . . . . . . . . 5 settings for fixed network calls . . . . 31
Emergency numbers toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
always dialled via fixed network . . . 95 Fixed network connection
entering own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 creating settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
End call key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 22 name (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . 84
Ending, call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Flat rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Enquiry call Format directory file on PC . . . . . . . . 96
ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fragmentation of data packets. . . . . 124
external (fixed network) . . . . . . . . . 31 Free software, licences . . . . . . . . . . 114
external (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Full duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 75
Enter flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 G
Enter pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 G711 µ law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Entering access data (e-mail) . . . . 49, 98 G711 a law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Error handling G726 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 G729 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Error tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Gateway Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Example Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
entering directory into tsv file . . . . . 96 calling subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
menu input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 changing/deleting own name . . . . . 29
multiple line input . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Explicit Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 entering name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29
External enquiry call searching for subscriber . . . . . . . . . 27
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Gigaset.net directory
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 specifying/editing own name . . . . . 29
Global IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
F Global System for
Factory settings Mobile Communication. . . . . . . 125
base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 GNU Lesser General Public Licence . . 114
Fast access Going online (messenger) . . . . . . . . . 53
directory entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Group call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
network mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 H
automatic update . . . . . . . . . . 66, 100 Handset
checking version . . . . . . . . . . 101, 107 activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . 1, 24
defining server for update . . . . . . . . 99 activating/deactivating advisory
starting update (handset) . . . . . . . . 66 tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
starting update (Web configurator) 100 assigning receiving number . . . . . . 93
update from Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 99 assigning sending number . . . . . . . 93
update from local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 base station selection. . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fixed network changing internal names . . . . . . . . 74
accepting/rejecting call waiting . . . . 31 changing internal number . . . . . . . 74
activating/deactivating call waiting . 30 changing name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
changing to a different base
Version 4, 16.09.2005

call forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
cancelling ringback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 changing to best reception . . . . . . . 73

134
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

checking service information . . . . . 107 IEEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Incoming e-mail server (e-mail) . . 49, 98
deregistering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Incoming message list
display backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 opening (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Incoming message list (e-mail) . . . . . 50
idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Incoming server (e-mail) . . . . . . . . . . 49
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Incorrect input (correction) . . . . . . . . 26
locating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Info messages (messenger) . . . . . . . . 57
loudspeaker volume . . . . . . . . . 25, 61 Information services (SMS) . . . . . . . . 46
muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Infrastructure network . . . . . . . . . . 125
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Input language (message) . . . . . . . . 113
operating and charging times . . . . 109 Installation, base station . . . . . . . . . . . 9
registering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 72 Instant messaging . . . . . . . . 52, 97, 125
restoring to factory settings. . . . . . . 63 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
setting (individual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Institute of Electrical and
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Electronics Engineers . . . . . . . . 125
setting/changing the screen Interface language
picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
transferring a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
using room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Internal call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
using several . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Handset directory Internal enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . 25, 75
editing via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Handset operating time no connection to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
in room monitor mode . . . . . . . . . . 76 Internet access (broadband) . . . . . . 122
Handset reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Internet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Handsfree Internet Service Provider . . . . . . . . . 126
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 23 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 assigning (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 assigning (Web configurator) . . . . . 82
Hash key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 24 automatically obtaining one . . . 68, 82
Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 16, 125 checking (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Hearing aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 checking (Web configurator) . . . . 101
Hold music . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 65, 127 dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HTTP Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
I private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Icon public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
new messenger message . . . . . . . . 56 IP address type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 82
new SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 IP configuration
ringer tone deactivated . . . . . . . . . . 62 Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Idle status IP configuring
back to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 IP pool range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Version 4, 16.09.2005

135
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

J Local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Jabber ID (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Local SIP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Jabber server (messenger) . . . . . . . . . 97 Lock (keypad lock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Jabber server port (messenger) . . . . . 97 Login password
messenger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
K Lost connection
Key 1 (fast access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 messenger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 58
Key click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Loudspeaker volume . . . . . . . . . . 25, 61
Keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 24
Keys M
assigning directory entry . . . . . . 34, 35 MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
call-by-call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 checking (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
cancel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 checking (Web configurator) . . . . 101
control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 25 Mailbox ID, see SMS
delete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Mailboxes, see SMS
display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 25 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 26
end call key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 22, 26 Mains adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Making calls
handsfree key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 accepting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
hash key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 24 external (VoIP, fixed network) . . . . . 21
keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Making cost-effective calls . . . . . . . . . 39
message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 37 Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
on/off key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Maximum Receive Unit . . . . . . . . . . 126
paging key (base station) . . . . . . . . . 1 Maximum Transmission Unit . . . . . . 126
recall key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Mbps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
speed dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35 Media Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . 126
star key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 62 Medical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
talk key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Menu
L end tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 going back one menu level . . . . 25, 26
Language key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 menu guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 menu input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Last number redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 phone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LGPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Web configurator overview . . . . . . 20
Licences, free software. . . . . . . . . . . 114 Menu bar (Web configurator) . . . . . . 80
Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Message
List deleting (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . 57
calls list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 reading the subject (e-mail) . . . . . . 51
e-mail notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 receiving (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . 56
handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 receiving (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . . 37 writing/sending (messenger) . . . . . 57
missed calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 writing/sending (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . 40
Load directory onto PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Message from the network mailbox . . 72
Version 4, 16.09.2005

Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 opening lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

136
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

Message list Network area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Network mailbox
messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 assigning key 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 entering number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
calling buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Network provider (numbers list) . . . . 34
changing own status. . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Network services
entering access data . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 settings for fixed network
errors when sending . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31
lost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 58 settings for VoIP calls . . . . . . . . 32, 33
message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Notification
resource name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 incoming e-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Messenger message Notification via SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Number
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 as destination for room monitor . . . 76
receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 copying from an SMS text . . . . . . . 44
writing/sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 copying from directory . . . . . . . . . . 36
Messenger server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 copying to directory . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
establishing a connection . . . . . . . . 53 displaying caller’s number
Million bits per second . . . . . . . . . . . 126 (CLIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Missed calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 entering network mailbox . . . . . . . 71
MRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 entering with directory. . . . . . . . . . 36
MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 saving in the directory . . . . . . . . . . 34
Multiple line input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Muting Numbers list, network provider . . . . . 34
first ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Muting the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 O
Muting the microphone . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Offline (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
On/Off key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
N Online (messenger). . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
Name Online directory
changing name of the handset . . . . 74 Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
displayed (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
fixed network connection . . . . . . . . 89 Opening online directory . . . . . . . . . . 25
VoIP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Opening the incoming mail list. . . . . . 50
NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Operating time of handset. . . . . . . . 109
symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Operation (preparing to use
updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 the phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Navigation area Order in directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Outbound proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 127
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Network Address Translation . . . . . . 127
Version 4, 16.09.2005

137
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

P Q
PABX Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
operating base station on PABX . . . . 70 Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . 102
pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
setting dialling mode . . . . . . . . . . . 70 R
setting flash time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Random Access Memory . . . . . . . . . 128
Pack contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Read Only Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 73 Reading message (messenger). . . . . . 57
Pauses (PABX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Ready to chat (messenger) . . . . . . . . 54
Personal Identification Number. . . . . 127 Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Personal provider data . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Recall key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Phone Receiving number
configuring via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 assigning (Web configurator) . . . . . 93
menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 display on the handset . . . . . . . 22, 23
protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Registering
setting (Web configurator) . . . . . . . 81 handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 72
setting base station (on handset) . . 64 with the Web configurator . . . . . . . 78
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Registrar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Phone connection Registrar server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
configuring (Web configurator) . . . . 83 Registrar server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Phone functions, overview . . . . . . . . . 17 Registration name
Phone jack assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 98
Phone status (Web configurator) . . . 101 VoIP account . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 68, 85
Phoning, internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Registration password
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 98
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 VoIP account . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 68, 85
POP3 server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 98 Registration refresh time . . . . . . . . . . 86
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Reminder call (anniversary) . . . . . . . . 36
Port Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Remote access to Web configurator . . 83
Port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Remote management . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Power consumption (base station) . . 109 Resetting
Power consumption, base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
see Power consumption handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Pre-dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Resource name (messenger) . . . . . . . 97
Predictive text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 RFC 2833 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Preferred DNS server Ringback
entering (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 when busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
entering (Web configurator) . . . . . . 82 when the call is not answered . . . 128
Priority (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Ringer tone
Private IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 62
Problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . 102 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 deactivating permanently. . . . . . . . 62
Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 muting first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Proxy server address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 setting melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Public IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 setting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 61
Version 4, 16.09.2005

138
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 input language . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 113

Room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 mailbox ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 notification by SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
connecting base station . . . . . . . . . 11 notification number . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 notification type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
RTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 PIN protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
RTP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RTP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 129 receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
replying to and forwarding . . . . . . . 43
S saving number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 self help with error messages . . . . . 48
Search for subscriber on Gigaset.net . . 27 sending to a personal mailbox . . . . 45
Searching sending to an e-mail address . . . . . 42
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 setting up a mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . 45
in directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 status report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Select entry (menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 to a PABX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sender's address (e-mail) . . . . . . . . . . 51 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Sensitivity (room monitor) . . . . . . . . . 76 writing/sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 SMS centre
Server for firmware update . . . . . . . . . 99 changing number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Snooze (alarm clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Set default connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sound, see Ringer tone
Set ringer tone melody . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Speed dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35
date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Standard gateway
flashing time (PABX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 entering (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 entering (Web configurator) . . . . . . 82
Setting/changing the screen picture . . 59 Star key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 62
Shortcut (digit combination) . . . . . . . 17 Start connection assistant (menu) . . . 67
Signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 State of presence (messenger) . . . . . . 52
Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT . 129 setting own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Static IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 129
SIP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Status
SIP Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SIP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 129 change own (messenger) . . . . . . . . 54
SIP provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 VoIP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SIP proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Status codes (VoIP), table . . . . . . . . 105
Slumber mode (alarm clock) . . . . . . . . 63 Status report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Storing anniversary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
activating/deactivating function . . . 47 Structure of IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 126
changing mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 STUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 STUN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
draft message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 STUN refresh time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 STUN server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
information services . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Version 4, 16.09.2005

139
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 V
Subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Versions check, automatic . . . . . . . . 100
defining (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 VIP (directory entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
defining (Web configurator) . . . . . . 82 Voice over Internet Protocol . . . . . 7, 130
Suppressing Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Voice quality and infrastructure . . . . . 92
speech pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
speech pauses (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . 92 accepting/rejecting call waiting . . . 33
Symmetric NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 activating/deactivating call
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
T activating/deactivating status
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Talk key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
assigning IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Text message, see SMS
call diversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
completing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
disconnecting call . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 33
configuring account . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
configuring account (first) . . . . . . . 13
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
connection name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Touch tone dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
external enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Transferring PC address book
load provider data . . . . . . . 13, 67, 89
into directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
making call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transmission Control Protocol . . . . . . 130
network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transmission rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Transport Layer Security . . . . . . . . . . 130
preconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transport protocol.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
settings (on handset) . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
start connection assistant. . . . . 12, 67
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
status codes (table) . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Internet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
VoIP connection
tsv file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . 84, 88
U configuring (handset) . . . . . . . . . . 67
UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 configuring (Web configurator) . . . 84
Uniform Resource Identifier . . . . . . . 130 name (Web configurator) . . . . . 84, 85
Universal Resource Locator . . . . . . . . 130 VoIP provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Unknown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 download data . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 89
Unknown caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 selecting (Web configurator) . . . . . 85
URI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 updating data automatically . . . . . 100
URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 VoIP status messages
Use random ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 activating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
User data, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 status codes table . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
User Datagram Protocol . . . . . . . . . . 130 VoIP user data
User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
User identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 entering (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
User name (VoIP account) . . . 13, 68, 85 entering (Web configurator) . . . . . . 85
Version 4, 16.09.2005

140
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / S450IP_laenderSIX.fm / 28.3.07

Index

Volume Web interface, see Web configurator

earpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Web page (Web configurator)
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
handset language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Web server, see Web configurator
ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Wide Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Working area (Web configurator) . . . . 80
W Writing (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Writing, editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning tone, see Advisory tones
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
activating VoIP connection . . . . . . . 84
alternative DNS server. . . . . . . . . . . 82
assigning receiving number. . . . . . . 93
assigning sending number . . . . . . . 93
checking EEPROM version . . . . . . . 101
checking firmware version . . . . . . 101
checking IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
checking MAC address . . . . . . . . . 101
connecting with PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
creating e-mail settings . . . . . . . . . . 98
deactivating VoIP connection . . . . . 84
defining IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
defining standard gateway . . . . . . . 82
de-registering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DTMF-reminder for VoIP . . . . . . . . . 93
interface language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
messenger access data . . . . . . . . . . 97
name of a connection . . . . . . . . . . . 84
name of a VoIP connection . . . . . . . 85
number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
opening Web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
phone status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
preferred DNS server . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
selecting IP address type . . . . . . . . . 82
setting phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
specifying dialling plans . . . . . . . . . 94
status of a VoIP connection . . . . . . . 84
structure of the web pages . . . . . . . 79
subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Version 4, 16.09.2005

141
 Gigaset S450 IP LBA / IM-Nord_en / A31008-M1713-R221-2-7619 / montage_charger_base.fm / 28.3.07
Version 4, 16.09.2005

142